Home

Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User's Guide

1. CPID Matching Calling i Called 2 Redirect f Number Number Number Calling x Called E Redirect f Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection Outbound Trunk Route 7 B Destination von Group Los ancela Gateway Method Bogen CPID Manipulation Calling S Called D Redirect R Number Number Number Calling Called Redirect Name S Name D Name i Select Primary Alternate Route e Primary o Al 1 o Alt 2 o Alt 3 o Alt4 194 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Inbound TDM Rule 3 All other inbound TDM calls from the span connected to the PBX must be routed out the TDM span connected to the CO requirement 4 Routing Table Inbound TDM Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Trunk Group X Calls From CO Call Span to CO X Calls From PBX To LA Call Span to PBX X Calls From PBX to PSTN Call Span to PBX Inbound TDM Request Matching CPID Matching Calling x Called 1 Redirect f Number Number Number Calling x Called m Redirect f Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection dU ane weno Bridged Destination TOM Group Spamo LO Method Bridged CPID Man
2. 4 36 Lppradus The SoA str P RARDRRE RPG dere RE LA A ERN ED LEE UE ad 38 Note Refer to the Getting Started Guide for information about initially logging on to the Media Gateway and performing basic configuration via the serial port 2 1 Setting the IP Address Once the IP address of the Media Gateway unit has been configured through the Web interface the unit must be restarted to activate the new configuration The Media Gateway unit will then be accessible to the Web browser at the newly configured IP address All configuration parameters are saved in the Media Gateway s non volatile memory Use the following steps to assign the Media Gateway a unique IP address 1 Select the IP configuration Web page from the Configuration menu on the left side of the Web page 2 Change the unit s IP address from the default address by entering the new IP address in the Client IP Address box 3 Configure the subnet mask if it is different from the default value by entering the new subnet mask in the Client Subnet Mask box 4 Configure the IP address of the default network gateway router by entering the IP address in the Default Network Gateway Address box 5 Click on the Apply Changes button to save the configuration in the database Note Refer to Chapter 3 Parameter Reference for a description of all of the configuration parameters that may be changed 6 For the configuration change to take effect you will be prompted
3. Line Echo Cancellation NLP DMG1000 Only Voice Activity Noise Floor Voice Activity Measurement Period DMG2000 Only Voice Activity Signal to Noise Ratio DMG2000 Only Call Progress Filter Threshold Call Progress Filter Debounce e Call Progress Filter Percent DMG1000 Only e Call Progress Filter Low Cutoff DMG1000 Only Call Progress Filter High Cutoff DMG1000 Only Call Progress Filter SNR in dB DMG2000 Only Call Progress Filter Two Tones Max Twist in dB DMG2000 Only Jitter Buffer Minimum Delay DMG2000 Only Jitter Buffer Maximum Delay DMG2000 Only e Jitter Buffer Initial Delay DMG2000 Only e Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period DMG2000 Only Jitter Buffer Deletion Threshold DMG2000 Only Jitter Buffer Frame Deletion Mode DMG2000 Only Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 17 1 1 3 17 1 2 3 17 1 3 Parameter Reference P to PCM AGC Enable DMG2000 Only P to PCM AGC Slew Rate DMG2000 Only P to PCM AGC Target Level DMG2000 Only P to PCM AGC Max Gain DMG2000 Only P to PCM AGC Min Gain DMG2000 Only TDM to IP AGC Enable DMG2000 Only TDM to IP AGC Slew Rate DMG2000 Only TDM to IP AGC Target Level DMG2000 Only TDM to IP AGC Max Gain DMG2000 Only TDM to IP AGC Min Gain DMG2000 Only TDM to IP Gain Adjustment DMG1000 Only Description Adjusts the gain of the audio signal in the Telephony to
4. Default Value None INI File Parameter Name telSerMode Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Serial Interface Protocol Description Sets the Media Gateway to the serial protocol used by the PBX Only valid when the Serial Mode parameter is set to Master Allowed Values SMDI MCI e MD110 Default Value SMDI INI File Parameter Name telSerProtocol Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed MCI Message Extension Length Description Specifies the extension length used in MCI messages Messages with six digit extensions or with eight digit extensions Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 111 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 14 4 3 14 5 3 14 6 112 Allowed Values e Six Digits Eight Digits Default Value Six Digits INI File Parameter Name telSerMciMsg MCI Message Type Description Specifies the type of MCI messages Messages can be Type B default or Type A Type B messages include a tenant number of 01 while Type A messages exclude a tenant number Allowed Values Type A Type B Default Value Type B INI File Parameter Name telSerMciMsgType CPID Length Description For SMDI specifies the length of the extension field in an MWI request sent to the PBX from the DMG1000 For MD110 specifies the length of the calling and called party information contained in the CPID serial data packet from the P
5. Inband CPID Complete Timeout Description Specifies the number of milliseconds the DMG1000 will wait for each subsequent inband DTMF digit to arrive If no digit is received within this time the CPID is assumed to be complete Allowed Values 100 to 2000 milliseconds Default Value 300 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telInbCpidEndMs CID to First Ring Timeout Description Specifies the number of milliseconds that are allowed from the end of the Type I CPID on the first ring If this time is exceeded the CPID is cleared This parameter is only needed when CPID arrives at the Gateway before the first ring This parameter can be ignored if the CPID arrives between the first and second ring Allowed Values 500 to 30000 milliseconds Default Value 2000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telAlgPreRingDtmfTimeoutMs Analog Interface Type Description Specifies the type of analog interface to which the DMG1000 is connected Allowed Values e PBX Central Office Default Value PBX INI File Parameter Name telAlglf Type Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 99 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 8 4 5 Note 3 8 4 6 Notes 3 8 4 7 100 Central Office Type I Caller ID Type Description Specifies the Type I Caller ID modulation to use either Bellcore FSK North America and Australia DTMF parts of Europe including Sweden Finland Denmark Netherlands and I
6. NI 2 DMS 100 5ESS Length 7 Subscriber Length 10 International All other lengths Unknown QSIG ETSI All number lengths Unknown Called Number Match Each CPID Matching rule must use the following syntax Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 105 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Table 5 Syntax for Number Matching Token Description s Matches all 0123456789 Identifies a specific digit digit digit Specifies a range of digit strings x Matches any single digit Matches any number of ending digits Called Number Plan Numbering Plan for the called party information Initially the value will be default which will set an appropriate value for the number plan depending on the called number Allowed Values Default Unknown ISDN E 164 Data X 121 Telex F 69 e Standard Private Reserved Table 6 Default Number Plan All Unknown Called Number Type Number Type for the called party information The user must select matching number type according to the selected number plan If the value is set to default the gateway will set an appropriate value depending on the called number Allowed Values Default Unknown International National Network 106 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 12 Caution 3 13 3 13 0 1 Parameter Reference Subscri
7. 0 0 00 RR ne 24 4 Multiple IP Gateways Using Serial Link llllilseleee rne 25 5 DMG1000 Web Interface liliis mre 29 6 DMG2000 Web Interface liliis rr 29 7 Example of a Network Topology ssssseseeee e eee eee 45 8 ISDN Call Type Rules Web Page cccccccccccccn ees 104 9 Manual Tones Web Page 0 0 cece ete nn 141 10 Learn Tone Web Page 0 ccc eee 143 11 VolP to TDM calls cios odiar a a e a fy 151 12 TBM to VoIP calls ERI tas a Ga ae ees a RU eRe 152 13 Routing Table Call Routing Flow 0 0 153 14 Inbound TDM Rules Configuration Web Page 0 0c cee eee 154 15 CPID Matching Configuration Web Page 000 e eee ee 156 16 Device Selection Configuration Web Page 0 00 cece eee 157 17 CPID Manipulation Configuration Web Page 0 060 cece eee 158 18 Select Primary Alternate Route Configuration Web Page 0 0002e ee eee 159 19 Inbound VoIP Rules Configuration Web Page 0 060 c eee 160 20 CPID Matching Configuration Web Page ooococcocccccncn 162 21 Device Selection Configuration Web Page 000 c eee tte eee 163 22 CPID Manipulation Configuration Web Page 0 saasaa aaaea 164 23 Select Primary Alternate Route Configuration Web Page ooooccccoccoccno co 165 24 TDM Trunk Groups Configuration Web Page 0 0 cee 166 25 VoIP Host Groups Configuration Web Pa
8. 0123456789 Identifies a specific digit digit digit digit Specifies a range of digit strings X Matches any single digit Matches any number of ending digits Figure 20 is a screen shot of the CPID Matching configuration Web page Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 161 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Figure 20 CPID Matching Configuration Web Page 5 2 3 3 162 Inbound VoIP Request Matching Calling py Called Redirect Number Number Number Calling m Called z Redirect R Name Name Name Calling Number The formula as specified in the section above that is used to match the calling number of the incoming call Calling Name The formula as specified in the section above that is used to match the calling name of the incoming call Called Number The formula as specified in the section above that is used to match the called number of the incoming call Called Name The formula as specified in the section above that is used to match the called name of the incoming call Redirect Number The formula as specified in the section above that is used to match the redirect number of the incoming call Redirect Name The formula as specified in the section above that is used to match the redirect name of the incoming call Outbound Routes Defines how the request is to be routed by the gateway This defines the network to which the request is to be routed as well as
9. Diagnostics Figure 41 Call Flow for Initiate Call Answer Call 230 Initiate Call Answer Call Originate Call RINGING ALERTING Answer Call CONNECTED Generate DTMF DTMF q DTMF Release Call DISCONNECT Generate DTMF E Initiate Call Answer Call and Transfer Call The call flow of the Initiate Call Answer Call and Transfer Call diagnostic test tries to verify not only the operation of originating an outbound call and answering an inbound call but transferring the call as well These tests also include verification of outbound call progress inbound CPID send receive DTMF and disconnect supervision Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics Figure 42 Call Flow for Initiate Call Answer Call and Transfer Call r Initiate Call Answer Call Transfer Call Originate Call RINGING ALERTING CPID CONNECTED DTMF DTMF Answer Call gt Generate DTMF RINGING CPID Answer Call CONNECTED DTMF Release Call DISCONNECT Generate DTMF Send Message Waiting Status The call flow of the Send Message Waiting Status diagnostic test tries to verify the message waiting notification set and clear update operation Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 231 Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics Figure 43 Call Flow for Send Message Wa
10. End Time Source End Reason Inbound info Outbound info 3 2 16 10 10 42 2 16 10 10 42 From Test App TDM Normal Mwi Clear 1234 John Doe gt 628 2 2 16 10 10 35 2 16 10 10 35 From Test App TDM Normal Mwi Set 1234 John Doe gt 628 1 628 2 16 10 10 25 2 16 10 10 26 From Test App TDM Normal 1234 John Doe gt 628 gt Rsn Direct 1 1 628 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 225 Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics 9 3 9 3 1 9 3 1 1 9 3 1 2 Note 226 TDM Self Verification Test TDM Self Verification is discussed in the following topics TDM Self Verification Test Overview TDM Self Verification Test Operation TDM Self Verification Test Overview The TDM self verification diagnostic tool is a Web page user application that can be used to provide verification of PBX compatibility and also to confirm the Media Gateway configuration values relating to the PBX interface are valid Features Currently the TDM self verification diagnostic provides the ability to verify the following operations Initiate Call Originate an outbound PBX call Receive outbound call progress alerting e Send and Receive DTMF digits Receive far end disconnect supervision Answer Call Answer an incoming PBX call Receive call party identification CPID e Send and Receive DTMF digits Release an active call Transfer Call Transfer a connected PBX call Answer a
11. Failover enabled span 1 to span 2 and span 3 to span 4 e No Failover disabled spans not interconnected Default Value No INI File Parameter Name tle1 Failover Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 89 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 7 4 E1 ISDN Protocol Group ISDN Signaling Mode The parameters in the El ISDN Protocol group include the following Line Coding Framing e Selects Transmit Pulse Waveform e ISDN Protocol SDN Protocol Variant Contiguous B Channel Multiple Diversion Processing Outbound TDM Calling Party Source e Static TDM Calling Party ISDN Answer Supervision Enable e Enable Failover 3 7 4 1 Line Coding Description Specifies the type of El line coding that will be used Allowed Values e AMI Alternate Mark Inversion line coding is used HDB3 High Density Bipolar Three line coding is used Default Value HDB3 INI File Parameter Name el Encoding Note Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed 3 7 4 2 Framing 90 Description Specifies the type of El framing that will be used by the line Allowed Values CRC MF Multiframe format with CRC is used FR Basic frame format is used e MF Multiframe format is used Default Value CRC FMF INI File Parameter Name elFraming Note Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Gui
12. Registration Server Address Registration Server Port Registration Expiration DNS Server Address Description Specifies the IP address of the Domain Name Server DNS that the Media Gateway will use to resolve IP address information Notes 1 If the DNS Server IP Address parameter is configured but the Primary Proxy Server Address Note 3 3 2 2 56 parameter is not the Media Gateway will use the DNS Server to resolve IP address information 2 If both the DNS Server IP Address parameter and the Primary Proxy Server Address parameter are configured the Media Gateway will use the Proxy Server for all requests 3 If the DNS Server IP Address parameter is configured and the Primary Proxy Server Address parameter is configured with an alias then the Media Gateway will first use the DNS Server to resolve the alias of the Proxy Server to an IP address and then use the Proxy Server for all subsequent requests Allowed Values Any valid IP Address in dotted decimal notation Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name sipDnsServerAddr Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed DNS Server Address 2 Description Specifies the IP address of the Domain Name Server DNS that the Media Gateway will use to resolve IP address information Allowed Values Any valid IP Address in dotted decimal notation Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3
13. e No PBX will not send a confirmation tone Default Value No INI File Parameter Name tel MwiConfirm Use Same Port for MWI Clear Set Description Specifies if the PBX requires that the telephony station that set an MWI be used to clear the MWI Some PBX types require that the port that set an MWI be the same port that clears the MWI Allowed Values Yes Use the same port to set and clear the MWI No Not necessary to use the same port to clear an MWI that was used to set the MWI Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name tel MwiSamePort CPID Settings Group The Analog parameters in the CPID settings group include e Initial Wait for Inband CPID e Inband CPID Complete Timeout e CID to First Ring Timeout Analog Interface Type Central Office Type I Caller ID Type Central Office Type I Caller ID Alert Type Central Office Type I FSK Caller ID Expiration Central Office Type I FSK Caller ID Timeout e Auto Answer Inbound TDM Calls Type II CPID Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 8 4 1 3 8 4 2 3 8 4 3 Note 3 8 4 4 Parameter Reference Initial Wait for Inband CPID Description Specifies the number of milliseconds the DMG1000 will wait for the first inband DTMF digit to arrive after answering an incoming PBX call Allowed Values 100 to 10000 milliseconds Default Value 2000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telInbCpidStartMs
14. frequency DTMF tones are transported between the Media Gateway and VoIP endpoints Note The Inband Tone method passes the digits as audio data in the RTP stream and is only reliable when the parameter Audio Compression is set to G 711 only The AVT method uses RFC 2833 RTP packets to pass the digits Allowed Values Phone Emulating None The Media Gateway will not use RTP packets to transmit receive tone information RFC2833 z The DTMP tone information is sent between the Media Gateway and VoIP endpoints via RTP packets as defined by RFC 2833 Note payload type of 101 is used in the implementation of the RFC2833 method Inband Tone The DTMF tones are coded into the regular audio packets RTP voice packets sent between the Media Gateway and VoIP endpoints Default Value RFC2833 INI File Parameter Name dspDigitRelay RTP Fax Modem Tone Relay Mode Description Selects the Realtime Transfer Protocol RTP method by which fax and modem tones are transported between the TDM network and VoIP network Allowed Values RFC2833 Fax and modem tones from the TDM network are sent as RFC2833 packets to the VoIP network RFC2833 packets from the VoIP network are rendered to TDM Inband Tone Fax and modem tones from the TDM network are passed through VoIP Inband Tone is only reliable when the Preferred Code parameter is set to G 711 only Default Value RFC2833 INI File Parameter Name dspFaxModemToneRelay
15. 0 DspCpi 1 Stat Tx Last Seq Number AAL2 UUI 1 DspCpi 1 Stat Tx Last Pkt Type 0 DspCpi 1 Stat Rx Last Pkt Type 0 DspCpi 1 Stat Rx Last Timestamp 0 DspCpi 1 Stat Rx Last Ssrc 0 252 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 Qududuucduduududuuduucuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuncocucuuuuuu ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ct ch Gh ct ct ct Rx Extended Seq Number Rx Last Seq Number AAL2 UUI Pkt Lost by Network Rx P2P Packets to Hosts Rx P2P Filtered Packets P2P Squelched Voice Packets Rx Net Packets Tx Net Packets Error Stats invalid_header_count to_micro_overflow_count lost_enh_packet_count no_core_packet_count pkt_lost_by_network rc4key_update_lost_pkt_c
16. 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 117 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 15 1 3 15 1 1 Note 3 15 1 2 Note 3 15 1 3 Note 3 15 1 4 Note 3 15 1 5 118 INI File Parameter Name cpToneTimeDeviation Tone Generation Configuration Parameters Call Progress Tone Generation Event Description The Tone event or type The tone will be interpreted as this type of call progress tone generation Allowed Values The configurable tone events are Dialtone Busy Ringback Congestion Error Disconnect Intercept Reorder and Special INI File Parameter Name cpGenToneEvent This is a ini file parameter only Call Progress Tone Generation Name Description A text string that describes the generation tone Allowed Values String with length between 0 31 characters INI File Parameter Name cpGenToneName This is a ini file parameter only Call Progress Tone Generation Num Cadence Cycles Description The number of cycles to play the tone Allowed Values Number between 0 255 INI File Parameter Name cpGenToneNumCycles This is a ini file parameter only Call Progress Tone Generation Frequency 1 Hz Description Frequency 1 contained within the tone Allowed Values Number between 0 3000 A value of O means to ignore the entry INI File Parameter Name cpGenToneFreqHz1 This is a ini file parameter only Call Progress Tone Generation Frequency 2 Hz
17. Gateway Application ROM Gateway Application Main Board Boot ROM DSP Firmware ROM DSP Firmware Telephony Interface Firmware ROM Telephony Interface Firmware Adept Config ROM Telephony Interface ID Port Flags Adept Config Telephony Interface Application Telephony Interface Boot Certificate Bundle ROM Diagnostics Information Selecting Diagnostics from the Status menu displays diagnostics information about the Media Gateway Refer to Chapter 9 Diagnostics for detailed information about the Media Gateway diagnostic capabilities Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics 9 9 1 9 1 1 9 1 1 1 9 1 1 2 This chapter describes how to perform diagnostics tasks on the Dialogic 1000 Media Gateway DMG1000 and Dialogic 2000 Media Gateway DMG2000 units and includes the following sections VoIP Interinee Tell zoseszado d iweei vend daw A 219 gt TDM Interinos T9530 eset vae teX rib ak edo ries 222 TDM Sel Venticalon Terrae 226 USERONUC LOBHIBE tries rra ida ee co Reed Rd E Edd 235 Communicating to the Terminal Interlade cooperar da 243 Trace MGORaDUEHE aisi ede AAA 244 Diagnostic Comma de escri ri AAA 255 VoIP Interface Test VoIP Interface Test is discussed in the following topics e VoIP Interface Test Overview VoIP Interface Test Operation VoIP Interface Test Overview The VoIP interface diagnostic tool is a Web
18. INI File Parameter Name t1IsdnProtocol Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 87 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 7 3 5 3 7 3 6 3 7 3 7 88 ISDN Protocol Variant Description Specifies the type of T1 ISDN protocol variant to be used Allowed Values None None Standard Alcatel Support Alcatel Extensions Ericsson Support Ericsson Extensions Avaya IP Office Support Avaya IP Office Extensions Nortel DMS 100 Support Nortel DMS 100 Extensions Default Value None INI File Parameter Name t1IsdnProtocol Variant Multiple Diversion Processing Description Selects which served diverting user to process when a call is received with multiple stages of diversion User A gt User B1 fwd gt User B2 fwd gt User C Allowed Values e First First served user User B1 Second Second served user User B2 Default Value First INI File Parameter Name isdnMultipleDiversion Network Specific Facilities NSF Description If NI 2 protocol is used and any value other than None is selected then the specified service type is included as an NSF Information Element in the outgoing ISDN packet Allowed Values None None Default IntraLATA_OUTWATS National ISDN OUTWATS Selection Foreign Exchange Foreign Exchange Selection TIE Trunk Tie Trunk Selection e Selective SCOS Selective Class of Call Screening Service Selection Access VP
19. MKT is supported on transmit stream Allowed Values Yes Transmit stream supports MKI No Transmit stream does not support MKI Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name srtpTxMkiEnable Note Currently the Media Gateway uses only one master key Key Derivation Enable Description Specifies if the Secure RTP SRTP Key is changed during a voice session Allowed Values Yes The SRTP Key is periodically changed during a voice session The period is determined by the Key Derivation Rate No A single SRTP Key is used during a voice session Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name srtpKdrEnable Key Derivation Rate Description Specifies the number of voice packets that cause the SRTP Key to be changed The number is 2 lt KDR gt Allowed Values 16 to 24 Default Value 16 INI File Parameter Name srtpKdrValue Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 71 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 72 Note Anti replay Window Size Hint Description Specifies the Anti replay window size hint Allowed Values 64 to 99 Default Value 64 INI File Parameter Name srtpWsh Cipher Mode Description Specifies the cipher used to encrypt voice packets Plain text is essentially no encryption and should be used only for testing purposes For no encryption you should specify RTP ONLY in the SRTP Preference parameter Allowed Values e Plain Text Use Plain Text as the
20. RTP Source IP Address Validation Description If set to On then the source IP address of received RTP packets must match the IP address to which RTP is being sent If the source IP address does not match then the packet is discarded If set to Off then the source IP address of received RTP packets is not validated Allowed Values e On Off Default Value Off Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 67 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 68 Note Note Note INI File Parameter Name gwRTPValidateSrcIp Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed RTP Source UDP Port Validation Description If set to On then the source UDP port of received RTP packets must match the UDP port to which RTP is being sent If the source UDP port does not match then the packet is discarded If set to Off then the source UDP port of received RTP packets is not validated Allowed Values e On Off Default Value Off INI File Parameter Name gwRTPValidateSrcPort Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Signaling Digit Relay Mode Description Specifies if out of band messages are used to transport DTMF tones between the Media Gateway and VoIP endpoints Specifically when set to On the Media Gateway will notify VoIP endpoints of received DTMF digits on the TDM interface via an out of band message e g SIP INFO The Media Gateway will accept out of band DTMF
21. Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the registration with the SIP Proxy Server is valid Allowed Values 60000 seconds Default Value 60000 seconds INI File Parameter Name sipExpRegSec TCP UDP Group The TCP UDP group includes the following parameters e UDP TCP Transport Enabled e TCP UDP Server Port e TCP Inactivity Timer UDP TCP Transport Enabled Description Enables or disables the UDP TCP transports Allowed Values e Yes UDP and TCP transports are enabled No UDP and TCP transports are disabled Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name sipUdpTcpEnabled Unit requires a restart 1f this parameter value is changed TCP UDP Server Port Description The TCP UDP Port of the Media Gateway on which SIP messages are sent received Allowed Values 1024 65000 Default Value 5060 INI File Parameter Name sipServerPort Unit requires a restart 1f this parameter value is changed Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 4 1 Note 3 3 4 2 Parameter Reference TCP Inactivity Timer Description Number of seconds after which an idle Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection will be closed Allowed Values 10 60000 seconds Default Value 30 seconds INI File Parameter Name sipTcpInactivitySec TLS Group The TLS group includes the following parameters TLS Transport Enabled TLS Server Port SS
22. When the Monitor Call Connections parameter is enabled set to Yes the Media Gateway will monitor the connection state of active IP calls If the active IP call has lost connection the Media Gateway will tear down the call Note If enabled in SIP the IP endpoints must support session timers Allowed Values Yes the Media Gateway monitors the connection state of active IP calls e No the Media Gateway does not monitor the connection state of active IP calls Default Value No INI File Parameter Name gwMonitorCallConns Call Monitor Interval Description Specifies the call monitor interval in seconds at which active IP calls are monitored in order to determine the connections status This parameter is only valid if the Monitor Call Connections parameter is enabled Allowed Values 30 through 3600 seconds Default Value 60 INI File Parameter Name gwMonitorCallIntSec Monitor VoIP Hosts Description When this parameter is enabled set to Yes the gateway will monitor the on line state of VoIP hosts that are configured to receive calls and or MWIs from the gateway The gateway will send SIP OPTIONS requests to the VoIP hosts to determine if they are on line Allowed Values e Yes No Default Value No INI File Parameter Name gwMonitorVoipHosts Note Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed VoIP Host Monitor Interval Description Interval in which VoIP hosts are monit
23. interface When a call is received the incoming call characteristics are compared against the values entered in the first row of the table If a match is found an action is taken If no match is found the next row in the table is checked Rows will be tested until a match is found or there are no more entries in the table The VoIP address Calling Number Calling Name Called Number Called Name Redirect Number and Redirect Name all need to match the incoming call for the test to pass Once a match occurs the CPID will be modified based on the CPID manipulation rule selected in the table Next the call will be routed according to the matched rules associated Outbound Routes fields Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 159 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table 5 2 3 1 If no rows in the table successfully match the incoming call the call is not routed Inbound VoIP Rules Use this table to define the routing rules for all telephony request that are inbound from the VoIP network Rules are evaluated from the top down until a matching rule is found Figure 19 is a screen shot of the Inbound VoIP Rules configuration Web Page Figure 19 Inbound VoIP Rules Configuration Web Page Note 160 Inbound VoIP Rules Select Enable _Ruletabel__ __Request Type _ Originating VoIP Host Address PO enean IR EL Add Rule Move Row Up Move Row Down Select to con
24. 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 Example 4 Enable trace of Stat Error Stats Stat invalid_header_count 1 Stat to_micro_overflow_count 0 Stat lost_enh_packet_count 0 Stat no_core_packet_count 0 Stat pkt_lost_by_network 0 Stat rc4key_update_lost_pkt_count 0 Stat invalid_mac_header_count 0 Stat invalid ssrc count 1 Stat invalid payload count 0 Stat Voice Playout Stats Stat avg playout delay 27 Stat lost packet count 0 Stat replay packet count 0 Stat idle packet count 0 Stat dropped packet count 0 Stat rx packet count 453 Stat avg frame jitter 1 ms Stat adpt po buf delay inc 0 Stat adpt po buf delay dec 0 Stat po buf underflow cnt 0 telephony protocol PIMG gt trace tel prot on Ok PIMG gt exit Good Bye Tel 1 Prot PIMGXX00152BB986F7A64E5028A7A1E69B2C7FA0D56681CB1D9F92D287C80C3F5D96593 Tel 1 Event Lamp 60 CallApp0 0 OFF gt FLASH Tel 1 Prot PIMGXX01171850BBCFB4660E32E3C0FC67C53DF45CB602FC847DCF07E52F678A1E8153EA9 Tel 1 Prot PIMGXX010744A Tel 1 Prot PIMGXX021790EDBC5B8E6F7 4C62762B8BE5CD5A11DDE4 9E8BD7AACA72910DAE88013BB77D Tel 1 Prot PIMGXX020610FA12D05 Tel 1 Prot PIMGXX0310E4CD136BB199A9C4596613EFB98084BB5EF810030EBEE7A1A8CD5CBA1A81831 Tel 1 Prot PIMGXX0307F2B Tel 1 Prot PIMGXX041E8AA914C95D9F88E5210FA3395984BD28D205B67AC46B4281E0AE991BE6606 Tel 1 Event 0 0 48 250 Tel 1 E
25. 26 Note Both the serial interface and the selection of which serial protocol to use are configurable using the Web interface Refer to Chapter 3 Parameter Reference for information about configuring the serial interface and serial protocols Call Routing in Phone Emulating Mode The Media Gateway routes calls from the Switch network to a VoIP destination on the IP network Conversely it routes calls from the IP network through a Switch port to a destination telephone number on the Switch network The Media Gateway supports the following call routing options User configurable list of VoIP Servers IP load Balancing e IP Fault Tolerance In its simplest form call routing is supported by configuring a single VoIP Server to receive and or originate calls through the Media Gateway In this manner all inbound Switch to IP calls will be sent to the single user configured VoIP endpoint For IP to Switch calls the telephony port will be selected in a round robin fashion where each IP to Switch call will be routed to the next available telephony port If the user configures more than one VoIP Server to receive and or originate calls through the Media Gateway then the user has the option to have the incoming Switch to IP calls load balanced between the configured VoIP Servers Specifically incoming Switch calls will be routed to a VoIP server in a round robin fashion For example if there are three 3 VoIP Servers configured th
26. 3 2 Routing Table Table 10 Syntax for VolP Host Address Token Description Matches any host address address Address may be a FQDN or an IP address and must match exactly IP_Addr N Matches any IP address whose left most N bits match the pattern in IP_Addr ex 10 10 11 0 24 would match any IP address of the form 10 10 11 XX acting the same as a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 A single entry may contain multiple hostnames and or IP Addr each separated by a comma For example 10 10 11 12 10 10 11 13 machine domain com Inbound VoIP Request Matching Defines the call party information expressions that are used to match an inbound telephony request from the VoIP network to this routing rule The Inbound VoIP Request Matching is performed when the inbound VoIP request matches the Request Type and Originating VoIP Address of one of the defined rules CPID Number Matching Part of the criteria for matching the characteristics of an incoming call to a rule in one of the Routing Table is number matching The incoming Calling Number Calling Name Called Number Called Name Redirect Number and Redirect Name is tested against a match rule defined in the Routing Table If the match fails this routing rule table entry will fail Table 11 shows the syntax used for CPID Matching Table 11 Syntax Used for CPID Matching Token Description Matches any number string when entered alone
27. 3 2 3 3 3 2 4 Note 3 3 2 5 Parameter Reference Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name sipDnsServerAddr2 DNS Translation of Phone Numbers Description If Yes the Media Gateway will use DNS to translate tel URIs and URIs with the user phone parameter If No the Media Gateway will not use DNS to translate these types of URIs Allowed Values e Yes No Default Value No INI File Parameter Name sipEnumDnsEnabled Registration Server Address Description IP Address of the SIP Registration Server that the Media Gateway should register with If blank the Media Gateway will not register with a Registration Server Allowed Values Any valid IP address in dotted decimal notation Blank Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name sipRegAddr Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Registration Server Port Description IP Port of the SIP Registration Server If a SIP Registration Server IP Address was entered for the Registration Server Address parameter then the Registration Server Port parameter must be set to a valid port number Allowed Values 1024 65000 Default Value 5060 INI File Parameter Name sipRegPort Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 57 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 3 2 6 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 Note 3 3 3 2 Note 58 Registration Expiration Description
28. 3 9 TDM Digital Parameters on page 101 Note The Telephony Switch Type parameter does not apply to the Models DMG1008MTLDNIW DMG1008LSW DMG1004LSW DMG2030DTIQ DMG2060DTIQ and DMG2120DTIQ For DMG2000 models select Line Mode Section 3 7 1 1 Line Mode on page 79 CAS Protocol Section 3 7 1 2 Signaling Mode on page 79 and Section 3 7 2 1 T1 CAS Protocol on page 80 or ISDN Protocol Section 3 7 1 2 Signaling Mode on page 79 and Section 3 7 3 4 ISDN Protocol on page 87 8 When prompted that the parameters have been successfully configured type restart at the PIMG gt prompt to restart the Media Gateway You should now be able to connect to the Media Gateway from the Web Interface using the newly configured IP Address 2 3 Changing the Password The steps for changing the password are described in the following procedure 1 Start your Web browser 2 In the Web browser address box enter the IP address of the Media Gateway that you wish to access 3 When the System Login Web page appears enter the user name and current password in the boxes provided and click on the Log On button Note The user name and password are case sensitive 4 Once the login has been accepted the Media Gateway Status Configuration Web page will appear Select the Password Web page from the Configuration menu on the left side of the page 5 Enter the current password in the Old Password box 6 E
29. 6 1 Note Media Gateway Parsers 6 This section describes the Dialogic Media Gateway in band Type I on hook and Type II off hook integration parsers for analog and T1 CAS integrations and the display parsers for digital integrations These parsers allow the user to define the meaning of either the in band on hook integration strings or display strings received from the telephony network For this discussion the term parser will be used when referencing all three variants listed above Various options for entering the configuration data parser syntax rules and several examples are presented The information in this section applies to all models of the Dialogic 1000 Media Gateway DMG1000 and Dialogic 2000 Media Gateway DMG2000 models using the CAS protocol Information about the Media Gateway parsers is included in the following sections EXamieurabon CIDIOUS eddie s 197 Parsing Configuration SyDISX o 045 s cers ees ss errar 198 The parser allows the user to enter rules that define the meaning of the strings that can be received from the telephony network The Media Gateway will use these rules to parse the strings and extract the source party information destination party information call reason direct busy ring no answer etc and call origin internal or external Note that the default rules supplied for the display parsing on digital units handle most scenarios but the analog CPID parsing default rules ar
30. 64 digits Default Value 0 INI File Parameter Name isdnOverlapRcvMinDigits ISDN Overlap Receive Timeout Description Specifies the number of milliseconds before the call is answered when in overlap receive mode This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not accessible through the Web interface Allowed Values 0 to 65535 milliseconds Default Value 14000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name isdnOverlapRcvToutMs ISDN Service Class Description This parameter can be used to control the Bearer Channel Parameters This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not accessible through the Web interface Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 137 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 18 7 Note Note 3 18 8 Note Note 138 Allowed Values e Speech e 3 1_kHz Audio Telephony FAX Group 2 and 3 Default Value Speech INI File Parameter Name isdnServiceClass SIP Phone Context From Description Defines the string that will be included in the phone context attribute include in From header of SIP messages sent from the gateway This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not accessible through the Web interface Allowed Values String with length between 0 254 characters Default Value Blank If the sipPhoneContextFrom string is blank the phone context attribute will not be included
31. Alternate Route e Primary o Alt 1 o Alt 2 o Alt 3 o Alt 4 Notes 1 A label for an Inbound VoIP rule can be the same as a label for an Inbound TDM rule Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 181 Routing Table Inbound VoIP Rule 2 CPID Manipulation CPID of the form ZZxxxxxxxx must be changed to 9011ZZxxxxxxxx Inbound VoIP Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Originating VoIP Host Address X Country Code One 1 Any X Other Country Codes Any Inbound VoIP Request Matching CPID Matching Calling Called M Redirect f Number Number Number ae nd pa Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection Outbound Trunk Destination 10M Group Any SUM canned CPID Manipulation Calling x Called a 3 Redirect Number 9011 Irem S 1 Number 9011 Irem D 1 Naber R Calling Called Redirect Name P Name B Name E Select Primary Alternate Route e Primary o Alt 1 o Alt 2 o Alt 3 o Alt 4 182 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Inbound VoIP Rule 3 An optional Catch All rule This rule does not correspond to any required CPID manipulation It is a catch all rule that is invoked if all the previous rules fail This rule is option
32. CEnimestea PATEAR Ee Y 121 DSPSett nps Paraiso AAA AAA 122 Non Menw Hidden Para meters i 46 5 0044644 rra daran rana 135 3 1 IP Settings The IP Settings include the following groups IP Settings LAN1 IP Settings LAN2 DMG2000 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 41 Parameter Reference 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 Note 3 1 1 2 Note 3 1 1 3 Note 42 IP Settings LAN1 The IP Settings LAN1 group includes the following parameters e Client IP Address Client Subnet Mask e Default Network Gateway Address e BOOTP Enabled SNTP Server IP Address Client IP Address Description Sets the IP address of the Media Gateway Allowed Values Any valid IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value 10 12 13 74 INI File Parameter Name ipClientAddr Unit requires a restart 1f this parameter value is changed Client Subnet Mask Description Sets the subnet mask of the Media Gateway Allowed Values Any valid IP mask Default Value 255 255 255 0 INI File Parameter Name ipSubnetMask Unit requires a restart 1f this parameter value is changed Default Network Gateway Address Description Sets the IP address of the default network gateway router Allowed Values Any valid IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value blank INI File Parameter Name ipRouterAddr Unit requires a restart 1f this parameter value is changed Dialog
33. Call Routing Flow Incoming Call Y gt Get next rule in table Do incoming c od Apply CPID caracteristics manipulation Route Call more rules in the table Do Not route call If no match is found the call is not routed by the Routing Table Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 153 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table 5 2 2 5 2 2 1 154 Inbound TDM Call Routing Rules The Inbound TDM Rules table is the main table used to route calls originating from the TDM interface When a call is received the incoming call characteristics are compared against the values entered in the first row of the table If a match is found an action is taken If no match is found the next row in the table is checked Rows will be tested until a match is found or there are no more entries in the table For a test to pass the channel of the incoming call must reside in the specified channel pool The Calling Number Calling Name Called Number Called Name Redirect Number and Redirect Name must also match the rule entered in the table Once a match occurs the CPID will be modified based on the CPID manipulation rule selected in the table Next the outgoing call will be made to the VoIP address specified in this table If no rows in the table successfully match the incoming call the call is not routed Inbound TDM Rules Use this table to define the routing rules for all te
34. Called Number Called Name Redirect Number and Redirect Name to determine the URL of the destination call Take the case where a call occurs as follows on a T1 interface Physical Source Interface 2 Channel 6 Calling Number 5402 Called Number 95551212 A call is being received on the 6th channel of physical interface 2 The calling number the caller is 5402 and the number called dialed is 95551212 Figure 12 below shows how this information enters the Routing Table control Figure 12 TDM to VoIP calls 5 2 152 Note Calling Number 5402 Calling Number Called Number 95551212 Dial Plan Called Number TDM interface 2 Channel6 VoIP Address The Routing Table configuration will determine the calling number called number redirect number and VoIP address of the destination call Router Configuration The Router Configuration manage the configuration of the Routing Table for the gateway The Routing Table defines how all telephony requests are routed through the gateway between networks It also defines the call party information manipulation rules for passing call party information between networks TDM Trunk Groups and VoIP Host Groups should be created first as they are referenced by both the Inbound TDM and Inbound VoIP routing rules The Web interface is used for configuring all 4 tables of the Routing Table New rul
35. DMG1000 and Dialogic 2000 Media Gateway DMG2000 configuration parameter that may be changed using the Web browser Configuration menu Also listed are non menu hidden parameters which are not accessible from the Configuration menu Changing non menu parameters significantly modifies the operation of the Media Gateway Included in this section is a description of each parameter the allowed values and where applicable the default value The parameters are grouped into the following major categories e AP Seas ead ee kd Rew GRE eae Uc qued su Ed E seed A ARAS 41 Management Protocols Para meters 12232909 eR ERA PR PUES Edu dad 47 VolP General PILAS 0 RRA ARE CE ER OUR TR EORR 53 Nor Medio PASTE C6 LR REX RUG Rieke A HO EE ARA DER REO 66 VolP Quality of Service Parameters ece keresnie e sake A 73 TDM General Para meters idea iia iii 75 TOM TE POMO ice scenes abd EATEN ERE IUE PR TESS RR dead 79 s TOM A dlog Parnes s eed eed kac iacit oodd A 94 TDM Digital PIEAMEIO S corona pi EG E RARE RR RAE ERA ERA Eras 101 e TDM Port Enable PAERHOIGIS 4 cp Ce A ea 102 TDM Call Type CUQOUD 0 624525 cee sere Rab I ER e RR ERR RR RR RR EUR b OR 103 TDM CPID Parsing Cantreuralolnn 2226ipp EiRRPRCKRGZGiIXARSCRERECRRREXHRASE 107 Serial Porte POESIE uu oa asdadscd den ed tae oe bg RS CRCRaa P ERI P Erebi 107 Serial Ports Switch Protocol Parameter i a er Ree I CERE RR eet 110 Tone Detection Parameters AA AAA ARA AA A 114
36. DMTF Send and Receive DTMF digits The PBX interface and channel are not configured properly The switch does not allow DTMF between interfaces and channels Receive far end disconnect supervision The PBX interface and channel are not configured properly Disconnect tone is not detected or being provided Transfer a connected PBX call The extension numbers for the PBX interface are not correct The PBX interface and channel are not configured properly Dial tone is not detected or being provided Send messages waiting notification request The PBX interface and channel are not configured properly No confirmation tone from the switch Feature Access Codes FAC is not correct The MWI extension number is not correct or does not accept message waiting status updates The MWI uses serial port and or it is not configured properly For more details on configuration see the nstallation and Configuration Integration Notes 9 3 2 6 Call Log The test results from the TDM self verification diagnostic tool are also stored in the Media Gateway call log The Source field will contain From Test App to indicate that the connection was created by a diagnostic application 234 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics The call log is accessible through the Web by selecting the Call Log link on the left side menu of any Web p
37. Data on Analog Web Page 6 2 198 See eee CPID Configuration rule 004 0d 3 10 src number 1 reason direct rule 0081 d 3 10 3 10 Import Export IP Mgmt Protocols Routing Table Serial Ports Tone Detection Certificates DSP Settings Diag cS Trace Logging Tests System Web UI Password Submit Cancel Reset to Default CPID Rules reason opening Done IL T T T T M nee 100 7 Parsing Configuration Syntax The configuration data syntax is used to describe the type I or II CPID analog or T1 CAS or display digital strings that may be received from the telephone network The type of information that can be received using analog DTMF integrations is a subset of that which can be gleaned from digital displays For this reason the rule syntax used for analog parsing is a much simpler subset of the digital parsing syntax The overall rule syntax is a subset of PERL The syntax supports the extraction of the following information Source Party Information may include ANI information for analog DTMF integrations this can only be numeric whereas for digital integrations the information can be a number and or a name Destination Party Information may include DNIS information for analog DTMF integrations this can only be numeric whereas for digital integrations the information can be a number and or a name Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialo
38. Detect Threshold DMG1000 Only Allow T 38 ECM Faxes DMG2000 Only Description Enables disables Error Correction Mode faxes in T 38 Allowed Values On ECM allowed e Off ECM disabled Default Value On INI File Parameter Name dspT38EcmEnable Transmit Small T4 ECM T 38 Packets DMG2000 Only Description Enables disables small T4 ECM packet transmission in T 38 Allowed Values e On Enable small 256 byte T4 ECM packet transmission e Off Wait for complete HDLC ECM frame from PCM before processing Default Value On INI File Parameter Name dspT38EcmSmallPacketEnable Enable T 38 Spoofing DMG2000 Only Description Enables disables spoofing in T 38 Allowed Values e On Enable T 38 spoofing e Off Disable T 38 spoofing Default Value On INI File Parameter Name dspT38SpoofingEnable TSI Removal DMG2000 Only Description Determines if the Transmitting Subscriber Identification TSI is removed Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 131 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 17 2 5 3 17 2 6 3 17 2 7 132 Allowed Values e On Remove TSI from TDM to reduce packet delay e Off Include TSI in packet sent to packet network Default Value Off INI File Parameter Name dspT38TsiRemovalEnable CSI Removal DMG2000 Only Description Determines if the Called Subscriber Identification CSI is removed Allowed Values On Rem
39. Dsplf DSP Media Interface 14 CadDet Dsp Call Progress 14 e e e e e DspRoot DSP OS independent layer e e e DspVad DSP Voice Activity Detector e e e e DspDmi DSP Management Interface e e e DspDimm DSP Management Interface e e e DspNw Network Interface for DSP 13 e e e DspUdp UDP IP Protocol Stack handling for e e e DSP 13 Dsplarp OS independent ARP interface 13 e e e Arp ARP Interface for DSP 14 e EthMgr Ethernet Manager for DSP 14 e e e Gcc Generic Call Control API e e e e Gw Gateway Application State Machine e e e e e Cfg Configuration Module e e e e e Web Web Interface e e e e e Si Serial Interface API 2 e 9 e e e e Smwi Serial Interface MWI Device 2 e e e e Silp Serial Interface IP Layer 2 e e e e e Pbn Packet Network Interface e e e e e SipCsm SIP State Machine e e e e e Adept Adept display parsing e e e e CallLog Call Log Handler e Alarm Alarm Handler e e e e Web Web Server e e e 246 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Table 17 Supported Trace Keys Continued Diagnostics pi Description Prot Code Error Warn Init Alarm Event Stat Log Diagnostics Logging Module aka e e e Enhanced Diagnostics Phd Phone Driving GCC Layer 3 e e e e e PhnDrv Phone Driving State Machine 3 e e e e e iNimDrv NIM telephony network Driver 3 4 11 e e e e e Dcif Direct Connect Inte
40. Fault Tolerant Host Summary Los Angeles Gateway false false 172 16 5 3 4 Set up Inbound TDM Rules Inbound TDM Rule 1 All inbound TDM calls from the span connected to the CO must be routed out the TDM span connected to the PBX routing requirement 2 Inbound TDM Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Trunk Group X Calls From CO Call Span to CO Inbound TDM Request Matching CPID Matching E es Number Number Number Calling Called ff Redirect ff Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection Outbound Trunk Route z Bridged Destination DM Group Span to PBX Method ali de CPID Manipulation Calling S Called D Redirect R Number Number Number Calling Called Redirect Name S Name p Name i Select Primary Alternate Route e Primary o Al 1 o Alt 2 o Alt 3 o Alt4 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 193 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Inbound TDM Rule 2 All inbound TDM calls from the span connected to the PBX and with a destination of 2xxx must be routed out the VoIP to the Los Angeles gateway 172 16 5 3 requirement 3 Inbound TDM Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Trunk Group X Calls From CO Call Span to CO X Calls From PBX To LA Call Span to PBX Inbound TDM Request Matching
41. Gateway Series User s Guide 205 Dialogic Corporation Data Security 7 2 1 206 When accessing the Media Gateway use https instead of the non secure http followed by the Media Gateway s URL This section includes the following information about HTTP security HTTPS Certificate Configuration e HTTPS Example HTTPS Certificate Configuration An HTTPS certificate can be either self signed or certificate authority CA signed A self signed certificate can be generated by the Media Gateway CA signed certificates must be requested by the Media Gateway and then signed by a CA When using a self signed certificate The Media Gateway generates a self signed public key certificate This certificate is then exported and downloaded from the Media Gateway to a PC via HTTP or HTTPS if already active The certificate is then configured into the Windows PC running the HTTPS Web browser used to connect to the Media Gateway From this PC the user logs on to the Media Gateway using the https URL HTTPS is then automatically used when accessing all subsequent Web pages When using a CA signed certificate The Media Gateway generates a certificate signature request CSR The CSR is exported from the Media Gateway to a PC via HTTP or HTTPS if already active The CSR is used by the CA to create a signed certificate The CA signed certificate is uploaded to the Media Gateway The root certificate
42. IP direction Allowed Values 14 dB to 14 dB Default Value 0 dB INI File Parameter Name dspPbxToIPGain IP to TDM Gain Adjustment DMG1000 Only Description Adjusts the gain of the audio signal in the IP to Telephony direction Allowed Values 14 dB to 14 dB Default Value 0 dB INI File Parameter Name dspIPtoPbxGain Line Echo Cancellation DMG1000 Only Description Enables or disables the echo canceller on the PBX TDM side Allowed Values e On Enables the echo canceller e Off Disables the echo canceller Default Value On INI File Parameter Name dspEc Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 123 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 17 1 4 3 17 1 5 Note 3 17 1 6 3 17 1 7 124 Line Echo Cancellation NLP DMG1000 Only Description Enables or disables the echo canceller non linear processor NLP on the PBX TDM side Allowed Values e On Enables the echo canceller NLP e Off Disables the echo canceller NLP Default Value On INI File Parameter Name dspEcNIp Voice Activity Noise Floor Description Defines the noise floor for the voice activity detector VAD Signal levels below the value selected will be treated as silence by the VAD Allowed Values 80 dB to 10 dB Default Value 40 dB DMG1000 32 dB DMG2000 INI File Parameter Name vadNoiseFloor Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Voice A
43. Media Gateway while the remaining units are considered serial protocol slaves Figure 4 shows how multiple Media Gateways connect to a switch or PSTN that uses a serial link to provide call party information It is the responsibility of the Master gateway to send all serial link data intended for Slave Gateways to the Slave Gateways across the IP network Similarly anytime a Slave Gateways needs to communicate to the switch or PSTN across the serial link the slave unit sends the data across the IP link to the Master Gateway The Master Gateway will then send the data across the serial link on behalf of the slave device Figure 4 Multiple IP Gateways Using Serial Link Note Only the Analog and T1 E1 Models LAN can connect to the PSTN Serial Link VoIP Terminal Device Media Gateway T Phone Emulating I l 1 8 Phone Lines Masten Gateway or1 4 T1 E1 Lines l l l Digital PBX Sus m Device Media Gateway Phone Emulating 1 n Phone Lines slave Gateways or T1 E1 Lines Note The T1 E1 Models must only be connected to the PSTN through an NTU CSU or other device that provides line isolation The Media Gateway supports the following serial protocols SMDI Simple Message Desk Interface MCI NEC Systems only MD110 Ericsson Systems only Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 25 Dialogic Corporation Overview 1 2 1 2 1
44. Name Called Number Called Name pem eene E ECL lem emm Rm LC lem Test Results Result Ready Reason G Inbound Rule ON Outbound Group OOOO Simulate Route Cancel Call Routing Examples Each example presents the requirements i e how you want the calls routed and the steps required to setup the routing table to meet the requirements The examples are presented in increasing complexity and build on each other The explanations presented in one example are not repeated in subsequent ones Example 1 Basic TDM to and from VoIP Example 2 Basic Call with Load Balancing Example 3 Basic Call with CPID Manipulation Example 4 Basic Call with MWI Example 5 Basic Call with Proxy Example 6 Toll Bypass Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Example 1 Basic TDM to from VoIP System Configuration Media Central Office T1 PBX Ti Gateway WAN Er Requirements 1 All inbound TDM calls must be routed to the media server IP address 172 13 4 3 2 All inbound VoIP calls must be routed out the TDM Any available TDM channel can be used Steps 1 Determine the required TDM Trunk Groups and the VoIP Host Groups e From requirement 1 we have a TDM trunk group of all TDM requests and a VoIP host group of 172 13 4 3 e From requirement 2 w
45. Note request is retransmitted at T2 Time intervals until a response is received or until the message has been retransmitted NumRetriesRequest times at which point the request expires Allowed Values 200 60000 milliseconds Default Value 4000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name sipT2TimeMs T4 Time Description The T4 Time specifies the time in milliseconds that the network will take to clear messages between client and server transactions Allowed Values 1000 60000 milliseconds Default Value 5000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name sipT4TimeMs T1 Multiplier Description Specifies the value to be multiplied by the T1 Timer parameter to determine the timeout for a SIP request For example if the T1 Timer is set to 500 milliseconds and the T1 Multiplier is set to 64 then the SIP request will fail in 32 seconds 64 0 5 seconds Allowed Values 1 255 Default Value 64 INI File Parameter Name sipT1 Multiplier Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Monitoring Group The Monitoring subgroup parameters only apply to a Media Gateway operating in the Phone Emulating Mode The Monitoring subgroup includes the following parameters Monitor Call Connections Call Monitor Interval Monitor VoIP Hosts VoIP Host Monitor Interval Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Monitor Call Connections Description
46. Preferred Calling party is derived from the VoIP call mwi request If not available from VoIP then the statically configured calling party is used Default Value Static Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 7 4 9 Note 3 7 4 10 Parameter Reference INI File Parameter Name gwTdmOutboundCallingPartySrc Static TDM Calling Party Description Specifies the calling party that will be provided to the TDM interface if Outbound TDM Calling Party Source is set to Static or VoIP_Preferred When a DMG2000 is connected to a Mitel PBX and is configured for El QSIG this parameter must be set to one of the following options in conjunction with the Outbound TDM Calling Party Source parameter Outbound TDM Calling Party Source set to Static and Static TDM Calling Party set to a number e g 1234 Outbound TDM Calling Party Source set to VoIP and the VoIP endpoint must provide a calling party number in the VoIP call MWI call request Outbound TDM Calling Party Source set to VoIP Preferred and Static TDM Calling Party set to a number e g 1234 Allowed Values Any valid dialable number Default Value 1234 INI File Parameter Name gwTdmOutboundCallingParty ISDN Answer Supervision Enable Description If Yes and an outbound call receives a Progress Indicator with a 1 or 8 non ISDN inband then the gateway will use in band answer supervision to determine when the ca
47. Rate e Serial Port Parity Serial Port Data Bits e Serial Port Stop Bits Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 107 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 108 Serial Port Baud Rate Description Specifies the baud rate of the Media Gateway serial port Allowed Values e 1200 1200 bps e 2400 2400 bps 9600 9600 bps e 19200 19200 bps e 38400 38400 bps Default Value 38400 INI File Parameter Name sysSerialBaudRate Serial Port Parity Description Specifies the parity of the Media Gateway serial port Allowed Values None Parity will not be used Even Even parity will be used Odd Odd parity will be used Default Value None INI File Parameter Name sysSerialParity Serial Port Data Bits Description Specifies the number of data bits used by the Media Gateway serial port Allowed Values e 7 data bits e 8 data bits Default Value 8 data bits INI File Parameter Name sysSerialDataBits Serial Port Stop Bits Description Specifies the number of stop bits used by the Media Gateway serial port Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 13 0 2 Parameter Reference Allowed Values e 1 stop bit e 2 stop bits Default Value 1 stop bit INI File Parameter Name sysSerialStopBits Serial Port COM2 Group DMG2000 Only The Serial Port COM2 group parameters are used to configure the DMG2000 diagnostics
48. SIP URI scheme Default Value No INI File Parameter Name sipSipsUriEnabled Invite Expiration Description Specifies the amount of time in seconds that an INVITE request sent by the Media Gateway is valid and can be accepted by the SIP endpoint After the defined time in seconds the INVITE request expires and is no longer valid Allowed Values 1 60000 seconds Default Value 60000 seconds INI File Parameter Name sipExpInvSec Reliable Provisional Responses Description Specifies whether the reliability of provisional responses PRACK is disabled supported or required by the UAC This is signaled with 100rel in the Supported and Required SIP headers Allowed Values None Reliable Provisional Response support is disabled e Supported Reliable Provisional Response is supported The INVITE messages generated by the gateway will contain 100rel in the Supported header sent to the VoIP endpoint Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 55 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 Required Reliable Provisional Response is required The INVITE messages generated by the gateway will contain 100rel in the Required header sent to the VoIP endpoint Default Value Supported INI File Parameter Name sipRelProvRsp Server Group The Server group includes the following parameters DNS Server Address DNS Server Address 2 DNS Translation of Phone Numbers
49. Serial Ports Switch Protocol Parameters 0 0000 cece eee eee ee 110 3 14 1 Serial Mode Master Slave liliis 111 3 14 2 Serial Interface Protocol 0600 ees 111 3 14 3 MCI Message Extension Length 0 000 eee eee eee 111 3 14 4 MCI Message Type oocccccccc sh 112 3 14 57 CRID Length 5 559 A Daher uie us tat a eer ls 112 3 14 6 CPID Padding String 0 00 cea 112 3 14 7 Voice Mail Port Length 0 2c eee 113 3 14 8 System Number 0 000 cece eta 113 3 14 9 MWI Response Timeout 0 00 eee 113 3 14 10 IP Address of Serial Server lilii ee 113 3 14 11 Serial CPID Expirati0N oocoococcoccononna ee 114 Tone Detection Parameters o ooccocccoccoo rn 114 3 15 1 Tone Generation Configuration Parameters 0 00 000 c eee eae 118 3 15 2 Editing the INI File Directly llle Bt 120 Certificates Parameters unuunu eens 121 3 16 1 Certificate Usage Group 2 0 2 ae 121 DSP Settings Parameters 0 0 0c eee 122 3 17 1 DSP Advanced Settings ooccoccoccccccnoc ees 122 3 17 2 T 38 Fax Advanced Settings o0ooccoccoccconnaa eee 130 3 17 3 Positive Answer Machine Detection 0 c eee eee 134 Non Menu Hidden Parameters tees 135 3 18 1 Incompatible Message STATUS 0000 eae 136 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Contents 3 18 2
50. User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 15 0 1 3 15 0 2 The Tone Generation Configuration parameters include the following Call Progress Tone Generation Event Call Progress Tone Generation Name Call Progress Tone Generation Num Cadence Cycles Call Progress Tone Generation Frequency 1 Hz Call Progress Tone Generation Frequency 2 Hz e Call Progress Tone Generation Frequency 3 Hz Call Progress Tone Generation Frequency 4 Hz Call Progress Tone Generation Amplitude 1 dBm Call Progress Tone Generation Amplitude 2 dBm Call Progress Tone Generation Amplitude 3 dBm Call Progress Tone Generation Amplitude 4 dBm e Call Progress Generation Cadence On Time Call Progress Generation Cadence Off Time Parameter Reference In addition you can edit the INI file directly if needed as discussed in the following topic Editing the INI File Directly ID Description Automatically assigned IDs for reference These IDs cannot be edited Tone Event Description Specifies the tone event for this tone definition Allowed Values None Dialtone Ringback Busy Congestion Disconnect Error SIT Pager Modem e Fax FaxCNG Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 115 Parameter Reference 3 15 0 3 3 15 0 4 3 15 0 5 3 15 0 6 116 Default Value None INI File Parameter Name cpToneEvent Tone Name Descripti
51. Validate Tone Progress web page 148 Validate Tone Results web page 148 validated tones 149 validating tones 147 validation errors 149 viewing 141 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 257 call routing un routable calls 26 changing the password 35 configuration information exporting 37 importing 38 configuration options 197 205 configuration procedure 35 configuration syntax 198 configuration via the serial port 34 connecting to terminal interface via Diagnostics connector 243 connecting to terminal interface via LAN connector 244 control of log files 236 CPID Group parameters 98 D debug trace capture 236 Description 77 78 88 92 devstat command 255 diagnostic logging 235 diagnostic logging overview 235 diagnostics control of log files 236 debug trace capture 236 diagnostic logging 235 diagnostic logging overview 235 network capture 239 PBX PSTN Interface Test 222 TDM capture 241 TDM Self Verification Test 226 VoIP Interface Test 219 display translation descriptors 201 DSP Advanced Group parameters 122 E E1 Configuration Group parameters 90 exporting configuration information 37 F Feature Codes Group parameters 95 258 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation G Gateway parameters Gateway Capabilities group 75 101 102 Gateway Web page 30 H Help 31 Import Export Web page 36 importing confi
52. administration serial port COM2 connector The system parameters in the Serial Port group include e Serial Port Baud Rate e Serial Port Parity Serial Port Data Bits e Serial Port Stop Bits Serial Port Baud Rate Description Specifies the baud rate of the DMG2000 serial port Allowed Values e 1200 1200 bps e 2400 2400 bps 9600 9600 bps e 19200 19200 bps e 38400 38400 bps e 57600 57600 bps 115200 115200 bps Default Value 115200 bps INI File Parameter Name sysSerialBaudRateCom2 Serial Port Parity Description Specifies the parity of the DMG2000 serial port Allowed Values None Parity will not be used Even Even parity will be used Odd Odd parity will be used Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 109 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 14 110 Note Default Value None INI File Parameter Name sysSerialParityCom2 Serial Port Data Bits Description Specifies the number of data bits used by the DMG2000 serial port Allowed Values e 7 data bits e 8 data bits Default Value 8 data bits INI File Parameter Name sysSerialDataBitsCom2 Serial Port Stop Bits Description Specifies the number of stop bits used by the DMG2000 serial port Allowed Values e 1 stop bit e 2 stop bits Default Value 1 stop bit INI File Parameter Name sysSerialStopBitsCom2 Serial Ports Switch Protocol Parameters The Switch Protoc
53. and telephony event tracing PIMG gt trace default trace lt trace key gt lt trace typelall gt lt onloff gt This trace command enables or disables trace types on specified trace keys Use trace tel all on to enable all telephony traces Use trace tel event on to enable telephony control traces trace all lt trace typelall gt lt onloff gt The trace all command enables disables trace types on all trace keys Use trace all code off to disable all code traces on all trace keys Use trace voip code on to enable code traces only on voip stacks Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 249 Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics 9 6 3 5 trace lt trace keylall gt reset This command resets specified or all trace keys to their defaults from system start 9 6 3 6 trace all off This command disables all traces except Error and Debug on all trace keys Error and Debug cannot be disabled 9 6 3 7 trace port lt 1 based port numberlall gt lt onloff gt This command enables or disables port related traces Use trace port all off to disable all telephony port related traces Use trace port 1 on to enable only telephony port 1 related traces 9 6 3 8 trace time lt onloff gt The trace time command enables or disables time stamps on traces 9 6 3 9 trace l This command displays trace types 9 6 4 Examples of Trace Commands and Displays The following are some examples of various trace
54. and does not condone or encourage any intellectual property infringement and disclaims any responsibility related thereto These intellectual property licenses may differ from country to country and it is the responsibility of those who develop the concepts or applications to be aware of and comply with different national license requirements Dialogic Dialogic Pro Brooktrout Diva Cantata SnowShore Eicon Eicon Networks NMS Communications NMS stylized Eiconcard SIPcontrol Diva ISDN TruFax Exnet EXS SwitchKit N20 Making Innovation Thrive Connecting to Growth Video is the New Voice Fusion Vision PacketMedia NaturalAccess NaturalCallControl NaturalConference NaturalFax and Shiva among others as well as related logos are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Dialogic Corporation or its subsidiaries Dialogic s trademarks may be used publicly only with permission from Dialogic Such permission may only be granted by Dialogic s legal department at 9800 Cavendish Blvd 5th Floor Montreal Quebec Canada H4M 2V9 Any authorized use of Dialogic s trademarks will be subject to full respect of the trademark guidelines published by Dialogic from time to time and any use of Dialogic s trademarks requires proper acknowledgement Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Other names of actual companies and product mentioned herein are the trademarks of their respecti
55. and listening to verify the tone 3 Navigate to the Learn Tone Web page see Figure 10 select the desired tones and enter the destination addresses for the tones to be learned 4 Click on the Learn button 5 Wait for the Learn Tone Results Web page to be displayed A progress page is displayed showing progress messages as the system proceeds 6 Select the newly learned tones to be added to the tone definition table and click on the Apply button Learn Tone Progress Once the Learn button has been selected the Media Gateway will start the process of acquiring the call progress tone characteristics A Learn Tone Progress page will automatically appear while the Gateway is acquiring the tones and progress messages will be posted Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 4 2 4 Call Progress Tones Progress messages are described as follows Learning The Gateway has gone off hook and dialed the destination address It is collecting raw data on the call progress tone Analyzing The Gateway is analyzing the raw data to extract the tone characteristics Comparing The Gateway is comparing the new tones to existing tones and other new tones for possible conflicts Validating The Gateway is redialing the destination addresses and testing to see if the new call progress tone definitions can detect the tones The Cancel button cancels the current session and returns to the Learn Tone Web p
56. and save the file to a directory The default name for the file is tones ini Clicking the Save button causes the Save As dialog box to appear c Click the Only Routing Table button in the Export Files box The File Download dialog box then appears You may click the Open button to view edit the configuration file in Notepad or click the Save button to download and save the file to a directory The default name for the file is dmg xml Clicking the Save button causes the Save As dialog box to appear Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 37 Dialogic Corporation Media Gateway Configuration 2 6 2 2 7 Caution 38 d Click the Only CPID Parsing Rules button in the Export Files box The File Download dialog box then appears You may click the Open button to view edit the configuration file in Notepad or click the Save button to download and save the file to a directory The default name for the file is cpid adt Clicking the Save button causes the Save As dialog box to appear e Click the Export Routing Table Schema button in the Export Files box The File Download dialog box then appears You may click the Open button to view edit the configuration file in Notepad or click the Save button to download and save the file to a directory The default name for the file is dmg xsd Clicking the Save button causes the Save As dialog box to appear 3 To save the configuration file to a directory click the Sav
57. books of accounts and all usual proper entries relating to each reproduction and Authorized User of the Software during the term of this Agreement and for a period of three 3 years thereafter During this period Dialogic may cause an audit to be made of the applicable records in order to verify Your compliance with this Agreement and prompt adjustment shall be made to compensate for any errors or omissions disclosed by such audit Any such audit shall be conducted by an independent certified public accountant selected by Dialogic and shall be conducted during the regular business hours at Your offices and in such a manner as not to interfere with Your normal business activities Any such audit shall be paid for by Dialogic unless material discrepancies are disclosed For such purposes material discrepancies shall mean an overuse of the Software by the number of Authorized Users within the Company exceeding the paid licensed number by more than three percent 3 If material discrepancies are disclosed Your Company agrees to pay Dialogic for the costs associated with the audit as well as the license fees for the additional Authorized Users In no event shall audits be made more frequently than semi annually unless the immediately preceding audit disclosed a material discrepancy TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT Dialogic may terminate this Software License Agreement at any time if You violate its terms Upon termination You will immediately destr
58. channels from the trunk group for outbound requests Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Linear Routing Table For gateways that have multiple channels per port the highest free channel on the highest port is used for the next call Descending or the lowest free channel on the lowest port is used for the next call Ascending For gateways that have a single channel per port the highest free channel is used for the next call Descending or the lowest free channel is used for the next call Ascending Cyclic For gateways that have multiple channels per port For Descending within a port the channels are cycled highest to lowest After using the lowest channel the next call is set to the next lower port s highest channel When reaching the lowest channel on the lowest port everything wraps For Ascending within a port the channels are cycled lowest to highest After using the highest channel the next call is sent to the next higher port s lowest channel When reaching the highest channel on the highest port everything wraps For gateways that have a single channel per port For Descending the ports are selected in a round robin fashion highest to lowest with wrapping For Ascending the ports are selected in a round robin fashion lowest to highest with wrapping Port Channel Content Each entry specifies the ports and channels that comprise the trunk group Th
59. cipher No encryption for testing purposes only Note Plain Text is not supported in Version 5 1 SU2 Software e AES Counter Mode Use AES Counter Mode as the cipher Default Value AES Counter Mode INI File Parameter Name srtpEncodeType Authentication Type Description Specifies the type of packet authentication used with Secure RTP It is recommended that you enable authentication when using Secure RTP Allowed Values None No authentication is used Note None is not supported in Version 5 1 SU2 Software e SHAI SHAI authentication type is used Default Value SHA1 INI File Parameter Name srtpAuthType Authentication Tag Length Description Specifies the length of the authentication tag transmitted with the voice packet A 32 bit tag length should be used when network loading is a concern Allowed Values e SHAI 32 bit Uses 32 bit authentication tag Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 5 Parameter Reference e SHAI 80 bit Uses 80 bit authentication tag Default Value SHA1 80 bit INI File Parameter Name srtpAuthTag VoIP Quality of Service Parameters The Quality of Service group includes the following parameters Call Control QOS Byte RTP QOS Type Call Control QOS Byte Description The Call Control QOS Byte parameter defines a decimal byte value that represents QOS bit flags This parameter is used in each call control SIP data
60. commands and the resulting displays Example 1 Enable tracing of telephony events such as button presses lamps displays tones etc PIMG gt trace tel event on Ok PIMG gt exit Good Bye 002 53 542 Tel 1 Event Lamp 60 CallApp0 0 OFF gt FLASH 002 53 782 Tel 1 Event 0 0 48 250 002 53 784 Tel 1 Event Cpid 250 gt Direct 250 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 002 002 002 003 003 003 003 59 5 2591 02 02 02 202 314 550 552 300 23 72 490 570 Example 2 Tel Tel Tel Tel Tel Tel Tel 2 2 Y 2 1 2 Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Enable tracing of SIP messages PIMG gt trace voip prot on Lamp 60 CallApp0 0 OFF gt FLASH 0 0 48 251 Cpid 251 Direct Lamp 60 CallApp0 0 FLASH gt OFF Lamp 60 CallApp0 0 FLASH gt OFF 0 0 48 MAY 13 7 44 P 0 0 48 MAY 13 7 44 P Diagnostics Ok PIMG gt exit Good Bye Tel 1 Event Lamp 60 CallApp0 0 OFF gt FLASH Tel 1 Event 0 0 48 250 Tel 1 Event Cpid 250 gt Direct VoIP Prot lt v 0 VoIP Prot o phone 26533 0 IN IP4 10 0 1 110 VoIP Prot s VoIP Prot c IN 1P4 10 0 1 110 VoIP Prot t 0 0 VoIP Prot m audio 49010 RTP AVP 0 8 101 VoIP Prot a rtpmap 0 PCMU 8000 1 VoIP Prot a rtpmap 8 PCMA 8000 1 VoIP Prot a rtpmap 101 telephone event 8000 VoIP Prot a fmtp 101 0 15 VoIP Prot a sendrecv V
61. connect event on an outbound circuit call If no connect event is received within the time specified the Media Gateway will automatically transition the call to the connected state Allowed Values 0 to 60000 milliseconds Default Value 10000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telConnectToutMs Wait for Ringback Connect on Blind Transfer Phone Emulating Only Description Specifies whether the gateway will wait for the detection of ringback tone or connection before completing a blind transfer of a circuit call If Yes is selected blind transfers will wait for a ringback tone or connect event voice before completing the transfer If No is selected a blind transfer will be completed as soon as the destination number is dialed Valid only in OnAnswer connect mode Allowed Values Yes No Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 77 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 78 Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name telBlindXfrWaitConfirm Hunt Group Extension Phone Emulating Only Description If the telephony ports are configured in a Hunt Group on the switch then enter the Hunt Group extension number in this field The gateway will use this field to ignore the Hunt Group extension when generating the call party information This ensures that the Hunt Group extension number is not mistaken for a calling or called party number Allowed Values Any valid dialable number string up to 7 c
62. data packet across the serial link containing the call party information associated with the call If configured to use the serial interface the Media Gateway will use the data in the serial packet as the call party information when the call notification is sent across the IP network to the VoIP terminal device that the call is intended for superseding any call information that may have arrived across the station set interface Finally the serial protocols also support the message waiting indication MWI feature that allows the Media Gateway to control message indications on telephone sets connected to the switch or PSTN For DMG1000 types the serial link from the switch is connected to the serial port interface on the DMG1000 DIAGNOSTICS connector Table 1 DIAGNOSTICS Connector Pin Designations in the Getting Started Guide shows the connector pin designations For DMG2000 types the serial link from the switch is connected to the serial port interface on the DMG2000 COM 1 or COM 2 connector Table 4 COM 1 and COM 2 Connector Pin Designations in the Getting Started Guide shows the connector pin designations Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Overview The switch only provides a single serial link connection At a site where there are multiple Media Gateway units only one of the units can be physically connected to the switch or PSTN serial link This unit is the serial protocol Master
63. er e Gane d yere a ee 58 3 34 TES a worsen ieee ea aa gre 59 3 3 5 Proxy GrOUD nes eere a Hon Doe Da eed Senet tee s 61 3 9 0 Timing OU Petardos tido ai oe Dated hae at 63 33 7 Monitoring Group cia ever sade da wile See ERI ER A 64 VoIP Media Parameters iee taria WEEE AERE ENR E A E eee 66 SAT Audio Group perigeenn a ee eee ead a a a a D rE E E 66 3 4 2 FaxQGroupuzs zu a da bos wag dE br dup RC E 70 AGS SHTP GIOUD sun rt oa SPA E A dd 70 VoIP Quality of Service Parameters ren 73 TDM General Parameters oooocccccoc eren 75 TDM TVET Parameters iba Rr OIX daha e REF nd dba es 79 SW TUETMode Group cone exer EDD ed estet 79 3 7 2 T1 CAS Protocol Group T1 CAS Signaling Mode 000000 80 3 7 8 T1 ISDN Protocol Group ISDN Signaling Mode oooococcccoo oo 86 3 7 4 E1 ISDN Protocol Group ISDN Signaling Mode llle 90 TDM Analog Parameters orsi ssion ti aen rn 94 3 8 1 Timing GroUp terre etse e eRe E wees Se REPRE Rate eS 94 3 82 Feature Code Group 00 ccc ern 95 3 8 3 Message Waiting Control Group silssleses eese 97 3 84 CPID Settings Groups perinde kaoa a n e a ern 98 TDM Digital Parameters 00 00 e rne 101 TDM Port Enable Parameters 0 00 0 nh 102 TDM Call Type Group 1 2 0 cnet eee 103 3 11 1 ISDN Call Type Rules i i esni eni aa e E eae 103 TDM CPID Parsing Configuration 00000 cet 107 Serial Ports Parameters rn 107
64. from the control of traces of the various software modules This allows the user to set the trace control of the modules as desired and then separately set the telephony ports that are needed to be traced Traces that are related to a telephony port number are tagged with the 1 based telephony port number to which they are related For instance Telephony port 1 events 002 53 542 Tel 1 Event Lamp 60 CallApp0 0 OFF gt FLASH 002 53 782 Tel 1 Event 0 0 48 250 002 53 784 Tel 1 Event Cpid 250 gt Direct 244 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 9 6 1 9 6 2 Diagnostics Telephony port 2 events 002 59 314 Tel 2 Event Lamp 60 CallApp0 0 OFF gt FLASH 002 59 550 Tel 2 Event 0 0 48 251 002 59 552 Tel 2 Event Cpid 251 gt Direct Time stamping of the trace output can be enabled or disabled by the user The telephony switch protocol can be traced but the output is encoded for security Trace Format The following is a description of the format of a trace display The example display is broken down into its components Example of trace display 003 02 372 Tel 2 Event Lamp 60 CallApp0 0 FLASH gt OFF Components 003 02 372 time stamp in minutes seconds milliseconds Tel 2 trace key and telephony port no port if non port related Event trace type Lamp 60 CallApp0 0 FLASH gt OFF Trace Utility The trace utility separates the control
65. in first row ignore these rule d d reason time TRUNK 102 IS CALLING FWD FROM JOEY ALWAYS rule bTRUNK b d b D bFROM b d b w b b src_name Outside Call dst_number 2 dst name 2 reason 1 origin external JOE IS CALLING FWD FROM JOEY ALWAYS rule b d b w bIS b D bFROM b d b w b b src number 1 src name 1 dst number 2 dst name 2 reason 1 455 IS CALLING JOE IS CALLING blah blah blah JOE IS RINGING YOU BACK rule b d b w bIS b D src number 1 Display Translation Descriptors trans reason FWD fwd all Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Media Gateway Parsers The parser attempts to match an input integration or display string to a rule defined by the configuration data If a match is made the parser uses the call party reason code and origin specifiers of the matching rule In this manner the parser can extract the call party information from the correct locations of the integration or display strings Translation descriptors define translations between telephone switch specific display tokens and strings that the application uses Translation descriptors are global translations that govern all display parsing rules The following is a reason code example 201 Media Gateway Parsers 6 2 2 202 The above provides a translation of the switch specific reason code FWD to the application string fwd all If the to
66. is only part of the suite of diagnostic utilities that can be used to assist in recording testing and resolving configuration or compatibility issues The Media Gateway diagnostic utilities are accessible via the Web interface by selecting the Diagnostics link on the left side menu of any Web page TDM Self Verification Test Operation To operate the TDM self verification diagnostic tool the user must first navigate to the Tests gt TDM Self Test link via the Media Gateway s user interface In the TDM Self Verification Test Configuration table 1 Choose the diagnostic test to perform by selecting one of the options in the Test Selection field The default selection is the Initiate Call Answer Call diagnostic test only but all diagnostic test calls can be selected to be executed as one operation 2 If the Initiate Call Answer Call or Transfer Call diagnostic tests are selected fill in the interface extension numbers of the interfaces that are to be included in the test Initiate Call Answer Call Requires two valid interface extension numbers Transfer Call Requires three valid interface extension numbers and is executed with the Initiate Call Answer Call diagnostic test 3 If the Send Message Waiting Status diagnostic test is selected fill in the Message Waiting Extension Number field with the extension to send the status update requests Note The Send Message Waiting Status diagnostic test does not allow individual
67. number gt lt called party name gt lt called party IP gt Outbound Info Displays the call party information of the outbound call If the call is From Switch Network this field contains the call information used to dial the outbound call to the IP network In this case the format of this field is lt alias or IP address dialed gt If the call is From VoIP Network this field contains the call information used to dial the outbound call to the PBX network In this case the format of this field is lt PBX port number gt lt number dialed gt Clicking on the Clear Log button will clear all call information from the Call Log table 216 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Unit Status 8 4 Telephony Status Information Selecting Telephony from the Status menu displays information about the state of each PBX port that connects to the Media Gateway For each port the following status information is provided e State DMG1000 In Service No Link Red Alarm Yellow Alarm Pend D Chan n a e State DMG2000 In Service NoLink Red Alarm Yellow Alarm Pend D Chan n a Note If the T1 El Signaling Mode parameter is set to ISDN the Port refers to the T1 or El span number 8 5 MIB II Status Information Selecting MIB II from the Status menu provides a number of Web subpages that include MIB II information as documented in RFC 1213 The Web su
68. of either the in band on hook integration strings or display strings received from the telephony network Chapter 7 Data Security provides information about configuring security on the Media Gateway for HTTP call control and voice Chapter 8 Unit Status describes the various types of status information that may be obtained about the Media Gateway Chapter 9 Diagnostics provides information about using diagnostic logging running the diagnostic tests and using the various terminal commands to perform diagnostics on the Media Gateway The products previously known as Intel NetStructure PBX Media Gateway and T1 E1 Media Gateway are now Dialogic 1000 Media Gateway DMG1000 and Dialogic 2000 Media Gateway DMG2000 For more product name changes refer to New Product Naming Conventions New Product Naming Conventions Previous Name New Name PBX IP Media Gateway Dialogic 1000 Media Gateway DMG1000 PIMG DMG1000 PIMG40LS DMG1004LSW PIMG80LS DMG1008LSW PIMG80DNI DMG1008DNIW PIMG80MTLDNI DMG1008MTLDNIW PIMG80RLMDNI DMG1008RLMDNIW T1 E1 IP Media Gateway Dialogic 2000 Media Gateway DMG2000 TIMG DMG2000 TIMGSOODTI DMG2030DTIQ TIMG600DTI DMG2060DTIQ TIMG1200DTI DMG2120DTIQ DMG2060DTISQ with survivability DMG2120DTISQ with survivability Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation About T
69. of software module trace output using trace keys A single trace key represents a functional software module The trace utility then uses trace types that can be enabled or disabled for each trace key The trace keys and trace types are used to enable or disable traces using the trace utility 9 6 2 1 Trace Key The trace key defines the specific sub system within the Media Gateway to trace For example if you are only interested in capturing SIP packets SIP Emulating or SIP Driving mode you would use the Volp trace key trace voip lt trace type gt on Table 17 describes all trace keys supported by the trace function as well as the trace types available to each trace key Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 245 Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics Table 17 Supported Trace Keys poses Description Prot Code Error Warn Init Alarm Event Stat System OS Independent layer System e e e e e initialization Tel Digital Telephony Interface for 8 e e e e e 6 protocol hook lamp display CPID in phone emulation and phone driving etc TelDrv Low layer ISDN trace coming from 15 e e e e e e the Telesoft driver Includes the RAW ISDN layer 3 packets 14 Volp Voice Over IP Software Stacks 1 10 e DspCpi Dsp Media Call Progress API media e e e e e e 7 session setup RTP stats
70. or the COM 2 connector on the DMG2000 models For connector pin designation information refer to the DIAGNOSTICS Connector Pin Designations table or the COM 1 and COM 2 Connector Pin Designations table in the Getting Started Guide Using a standard serial interface application for example Procomm Plus or HyperTerminal set the workstation to the following Baud Rate 38400 DMG1000 or 115200 DMG2000 bps Parity None e Data Bits 8 e Stop Bits 1 Hardware Flow Control Off Press the Enter key repeatedly until the following prompt appears PIMG gt 4 At the prompt type pwd and press Enter When prompted enter the password for the admin user the default is IpodAdmin and press Enter At the prompt type quickefg and press Enter You will then be prompted to enter the following Media Gateway parameter information Client IP Address See Client IP Address parameter information in Section 3 1 IP Settings on page 41 Client Subnet Mask See Client Subnet Mask parameter information in Section 3 1 IP Settings on page 41 Network Gateway IP if required See Default Network Gateway Address parameter information in Section 3 1 IP Settings on page 41 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Media Gateway Configuration For DMG1000 models select Telephony Switch Type See Telephony Switch Type parameter information in Section
71. that directs the LAN interface subnet mask and network gateway The advanced IP route rules include the following parameters Ethernet Interface Destination Address Destination Mask e Gateway Address An IP route rule is a custom routing rule on a specific LAN interface It allows access to a specific subnet that matches the destination address mask via the specified gateway address This rule supplements or replaces the functionality of the default network gateway address by providing access to multiple subnets across all LAN interfaces The IP route rules are available on the DMG2000 only Ethernet Interface Description Specifies the LAN interface used for the route The Gateway Address must be on the same subnet as this LAN interface Allowed Values LANI IP route will use LANI e LAN2 IP route will use LAN2 Default Value LANI INI File Parameter Name ipRoutelf Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Destination Address Description Destination IP address that is combined with the destination mask to define the subnet range for the route Unused bits may be set to 0 Allowed Values Any valid IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value blank INI File Parameter Name ipRouteDest Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 2 3 2 1 Note Note Parameter Referen
72. the CPID Manipulation expressions that are to be used to manipulate CPID prior to routing the request Device Selection Specifies the destination network of the route and how the request is to be routed Figure 21 is a screen shot of the Device Selection configuration Web page Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Figure 21 Device Selection Configuration Web Page Outbound Routes on TDM au crunk Fractional T1 v estination Group CPID Manipulation Calling Called D Redirect R Number Number Number S i Called Redirect Select Primary Alternate Route O Primary Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 4 Add Altemate Route Outbound Destination Specifies the network to which the request is to be routed VoIP Route to the VoIP network TDM Route to the TDM network Blocked Request is not routed The inbound request will be immediately rejected Host Group Name of VoIP Host Group to which the request is to be routed Note This selection box is only present when the Outbound Destination is set to VoIP Trunk Group Name of TDM Trunk Group to which the request is to be routed Note This selection box is only present when the Outbound Destination is set to TDM CPID Number Manipulation CPID manipulation defines rules for how Calling Number Calling Name Called Number Called Name Redirect Number and Redirect Name appear in the destination cal
73. to restart the Media Gateway by clicking on Restart on the Web page or by selecting Restart from the Configuration menu 7 When the Restart Web page appears click on Restart Unit Now to restart the Media Gateway Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 33 Dialogic Corporation Media Gateway Configuration 2 2 34 8 Once the system completes its initialization after approximately one minute browse to the new IP address The Web browser can now access the unit at the new IP address If it was necessary to change the IP address of your Windows workstation in the Initial Log On procedure described in the Getting Started Guide you should now change it back to the original IP address and access the Media Gateway using the Media Gateway s newly configured IP address You must now log on to the system again After logging on the Summary Web page will now appear You may now select any item from the Status or Configuration menu Basic Configuration Via the Serial Port When the default IP address is unreachable or if a previously configured IP address becomes unreachable on your network use the following procedure to set the Client IP Address Client Subnet Mask Default Network Gateway Address Operating Mode and PBX Type parameters of the Media Gateway 1 Connect a serial cable to the serial connector on the rear panel of the Media Gateway unit DIAGNOSTICS connector on the DMG1000 models
74. x Redirect y Number Number Number Calling Called x Redirect f Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection Outbound Vorr Host All To 172 13 43 Destination Group CPID Manipulation Calling EET Called s Redirect Number ull Number D Number R Calling Called Redirect Name 2 Name B Name R Select Primary Alternate Route e Primary o Alt 1 o Alt 2 o Alt 3 o Alt 4 180 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 5 Set up Inbound VoIP Rules Routing Table There is arule for every CPID manipulation plus an optional catch all Inbound VoIP Rule 1 CPID Manipulation CPID of the form 1YYYxxxxxxx must be changed to 91 Y Y Yxxxxxxx Inbound VoIP Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Originating VoIP Host Address X Country Code One 1 Any Inbound VoIP Request Matching CPID Matching Calling ul Called m Redirect y Number Number Number Calling x Called x Redirect f Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection Outbound Trunk Destination PI Group Any LOM channel CPID Manipulation Calling a Called Hass Redirect Number 9 Irem S 1 Number 2 rem Dd Number Calling Called Redirect Name S Name D Name R Select Primary
75. 00 Status Web pages allow an administrator to view the number of calls processed by the unit as well as a log of all calls with call party information The Media Gateway supports SNMP Version 1 The Media Gateway specific SNMP MIB can be downloaded from the unit using the Web interface The MIB file dmg mib can be downloaded from the Media Gateway Status MIB II Web sub page Types of information available from the Status menu include e Summary Information e Alarm Information Coll Los tatus Morna sicario EGER ECKE RR besa es Telephony Status OOOO deis EUR Rr C I ERR ic B IMIB I Status Informatii res A edo ase EA Ere Version Information 8 1 Summary Information Selecting Summary from the Status menu displays the following information Device Summary Information The Media Gateway MAC address The Media Gateway IP address Uptime of the unit Device Status Ethernet connection losses Telephony carrier losses GateKeeper ID if applicable Calls Summary Information Current Calls Inbound IP Calls IP to PBX Calls Inbound PBX Calls PBX to IP Calls Serial Protocol Status Enabled or Disabled Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 215 Unit Status 8 2 Alarm Information Selecting Alarm from the Status menu displays the following types of alarm information Time Timestamp of alarm entry ID Identifier o
76. 00 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 189 Routing Table Example 5 Basic Calls with Proxy This example is the same as Example 1 except a Proxy is used Physical System Configuration verses Logical System Configuration The proxy is connected to the same network as the Media Server However logically the proxy sits between the Gateway and the Media Server That is all messages from the Gateway go to the proxy and the proxy retransmits the messages to the Media Server All messages from the Media Server go to the proxy and the proxy retransmits them to the Gateway Physical System Configuration Media Server Central Office T1 PBX T1 Gateway WAN Proxy Logical System Configuration Central Office T1 PBX T1 Gateway WAN Proxy y ae Requirements The requirements are the same as Example 1 with the addition of using a Proxy at 172 16 100 1 port 5060 Steps The steps are the same as Example 1 with the addition of setting up the proxy The proxy setup is shown following Setup of Proxy e The Proxy is setup on the VoIP gt General web page under the Proxy section Proxy Primary Proxy Server Address 172 16 100 1 1 Primary Proxy Server Port 5060 Backup Proxy Server Address 2 Backup Proxy Server Address Proxy Query Inter
77. 000 cece 158 10 Syntax for VoIP Host Address 0 00 cece 161 11 Syntax Used for CPID Matching ooococccccnccnoc eee 161 12 Syntax Used for CPID Manipulation 0 00000 cc meh 163 13 TDM Port Types cond ete em toed oak aes ari wah aie aed der eed o 166 14 Parser Regular Expressions o oooooocccoo teens 202 15 Parser Reason Codes 0 000 cette eens 204 16 Mapping of Protocol and Span Numbers to TDM Capture Channel Numbers 241 17 Supported Trace KeyS 0 0 eee 246 18 Supported Trace TypeS anana cece 248 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 11 Dialogic Corporation Contents 12 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Revision History This revision history summarizes the changes made in each published version of this document Document No Publication Date Description of Revisions 64 0346 07 November 2009 Updated to support Version 6 0 SU3 2 Software Chapter 3 Parameter Reference updated parameter description for VoIP Host Monitor Interval in Monitoring Group Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added note to Codec Frame Size Frames Per Packet in Audio Group about DMG1000 with secure RTP SRTP Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in Non Menu Hidden Parameters for Incompatible Message STATUS Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter i
78. 3 IP Port Calling Number 100 Calling Name William Called Number 210 Called Name Jane Redirect Number 165 Redirect Name Mike Test Results Results Test Passed Reason Inbound Rule All VoIP Requests Outbound Group Any TDM Channel Outbound Route VoIP Device Bridged Method 1 see note 1 Port 1 see note 1 Channel 100 Calling Number William Calling Name 210 Called Number Jane Called Name 165 Redirect Number Mike Redirect Name Routing Table Since the TDM Trunk Group Any TDM Channel is ascending cyclic each time you click on Simulate Route the port amp channel is updated to the next one with wrapping Also the simulation remembers where it was so if you come back to the simulation the port amp channel pick up where they were Therefore you may not see port 1 and channel 1 but make sure each time you click Simulate Route the port amp channel update Click on Simulate Route a few times the port amp channel should cycle through all possibilities Try a few different values for Request Type and Host Validation Finished Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 175 Routing Table Example 2 Basic Call with Load Balancing System Configuration Central Office Requirements T1 PBX T1 Gateway Media WAN Server 1 Media Server 2 M
79. 33 2 2 Basic Configuration Via the Serial PO oo ooococooococco 34 2 3 Changing the Password ooooocooccocco tte 35 2 4 Configuration Procedure 0 0 ccc tenes 35 2 5 RestattOptionS ssepe e tee id saue ia a 36 2 6 Importing and Exporting Configuration Information sasaaa aaaea 36 2 6 1 Exporting Configuration Information liiis 37 2 6 2 Importing Configuration Information liiis 38 2 7 Upgrading the Software 1 0 rn 38 3 Parameter Reference 0 0c 41 3 1 IP Settings a rodar a Ei ARS AAA 41 3 1 1 IP Settings LANT sicui Re ra niana a Kuda BER RR eae bos 42 3 1 2 IP Settings LAN2 DMG2000 0 ce nee 43 3 1 3 IP Advanced Parameters DMG2000 ooccccccccncc serene 44 3 2 Management Protocols Parameters 0 c eee tee 47 3 21 E Mail Groups sss caese iee n rr era a 47 3 2 2 Sysbog Group econo pr a a Rorate ares 49 3 2 3 SNMP Group exercise REPE AIRE RES 50 3 24 Web Server Group 0 ects 52 3 25 Telnet Server Group 0 0 cee eee 53 3 3 VoIP General Parameters 00 000 ccc ren 53 3 81 User Agent Group 0 0 2 0 serene 54 3 9 2 Server Groups sus eur rl a eevee cede Eg Sanne ae ER RECS 56 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 5 Dialogic Corporation Contents 3 4 3 5 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 3 3 TCP UDP Group i
80. 4 Maximum Call Party Delay 76 Maximum live answer time 134 Maximum silence after voice has been detected 135 Maximum time to wait for voice 135 Minimum Call Party Delay 76 Minimum live answer time 135 MKI on Transmit Stream 71 Monitor Call Connections 65 Monitor VoIP Hosts 65 Multiple Diversion Processing E1 92 Multiple Diversion Processing T1 88 MWI Confirmation Tone Analog 98 MWI Confirmation Tone T1 85 MWI Response Timeout 113 262 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Network Specific Facilities NSF T1 88 Number of Cadence Cycles 116 Outbound Call Connect Timeout 77 Outbound TDM Calling Party Source E1 92 PBX Type 102 PCM Coding 75 PCM to IP AGC Enable 129 PCM to IP AGC Max Gain 130 PCM to IP AGC Min Gain 124 130 131 132 133 134 PCM to IP AGC Slew Rate 129 PCM to IP AGC Target Level 130 Port 103 Primary Proxy Server Address 62 Primary Proxy Server Port 62 Proxy Query Interval 63 QOS Precedence 73 QOS Type of Service 74 Registration Expiration 58 Registration Server Address 57 59 60 Registration Server Port 57 Reliable Provisional Responses 55 RFC 3960 Early Media Support 69 Ring Cycle Time 82 Ringing Timeout 82 95 RTP Digit Relay Mode 67 RTP Fax Modem Tone Relay Mode 67 RTP Source IP Address Validation 67 RTP Source UDP Port Validation 68 Selects Transmit Pulse Waveform El 91 Selects Transmit Pulse Waveform T1 87 Serial CPID Expirati
81. 455E5 VoIP Prot Contact lt sip 101 10 0 1 215 5060 gt VoIP Prot Server DMG1000 1 2 VoIP Prot Supported 100rel timer VoIP Prot Content Length 0 VoIP Prot VoIP Prot VoIP Prot gt SIP 2 0 180 Ringing VoIP Prot Via SIP 2 0 UDP 10 0 1 110 5060 VoIP Prot Call ID 01B2270D9C8140000000000680pbxgw default com VoIP Prot CSeq 1 INVITE VoIP Prot From 250 sip port1010 0 1 110 5060 user phone tag 1A1F32463135364100000ABE VoIP Prot To sip 101 10 0 1 215 tag 3246313536412A29002455E5 VoIP Prot Contact lt sip 101 10 0 1 215 5060 gt VoIP Prot Server DMG1000 1 2 VoIP Prot Supported 100rel timer VoIP Prot Content Length 0 VoIP Prot VoIP Prot Example 3 Enable trace of RTP statistics PIMG gt trace dspcpi stat on Ok PIMG gt exit Good Bye DspCpi 1 Stat Receive Transmit Stats DspCpi 1 Stat Rx Voice Packets 0 DspCpi 1 Stat Tx Voice Packets 2 DspCpi 1 Stat Tx Silence Suppressed Frames 0 DspCpi 1 Stat Rx Min Jitter 1 ms DspCpi 1 Stat Rx Max Jitter 0 ms DspCpi 1 Stat Rx RTP Avg Jitter 0 pcm samples DspCpi 1 Stat Tx Grant Sync Dropped Frames 0 DspCpi 1 Stat Tx Octets 160 DspCpi 1 Stat Rx Octets 0 DspCpi 1 Stat AAL2 Coding Profile Changes 0 DspCpi 1 Stat DTMF Tx Packets 0 DspCpi 1 Stat DTMF Rx Packets 0 DspCpi 1 Stat SID Rx Packets 0 DspCpi 1 Stat SID Tx Packets 0 DspCpi 1 Stat Tx Last Timestamp 10313 DspCpi 1 Stat Tx Extended Seq Number
82. 7 8 3 Set up VoIP Host Groups Name Load Balanced Fault Tolerant Host Summary All to 10 1 1 1 false false 10 1 1 1 186 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 4 Set up Inbound TDM Rules Routing Table Inbound TDM Rule 1 For Inbound TDM Requests requirement 1 Inbound TDM Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Trunk Group X All TDM Requests Any All TDM Requests Inbound TDM Request Matching CPID Matching Calling p Called FR Redirect f Number Number Number Calling x Called m Redirect r Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection E VoIP e All to 10 1 1 1 CPID Manipulation Calling S Called D Redirect R Number Number Number SEE qu uem Select Primary Alternate Route e Primary o Al 1 o Alt 2 o Alt 3 o Alt 4 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 187 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table 5 Setup Inbound VoIP Rules Inbound VoIP Rule 1 For inbound VoIP calls requirement 2 Inbound VoIP Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Originating VoIP Host Address X All VoIP Calls Cal
83. 7168675309 D Destination called number 5551212 R Redirection number l Inbound VolP address l 172 16 3 15 TE Takes what s in quotes as 353 353 literal Concatenate 800 D 8005551212 lext str n Extract n characters from left lext S 3 716 of str rext str n Extract n characters from right rext S 4 5309 of str Irem str n Remove n characters from left Irem S 3 8675309 of str rrem str n Remove n characters from rrem D 4 555 right of str mext str pos n Extract n characters from str mext S 5 2 53 starting pos digits from left repl str old new Find 1st occurrence of old in repl D 12 46 5554612 str and replace with new Figure 17 is a screen shot of the CPID Manipulation configuration Web page Figure 17 CPID Manipulation Configuration Web Page Outbound Destination 9 Primary Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 4 Outbound Routes Host Group HostGroup 1 CPID Manipulation Called Number D Called D Name Redirect R Number Redirect Name Add Altemate Route R Calling Number The formula as specified in the section above that determines the calling number of the outgoing call Calling Name The formula as specified in the section above that determines the calling name of the outgoing call 158 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Note Routing Table Called Number The formula as specified in the section above that
84. BX This parameter is only required when the serial protocol is set to SMDI or MD110 and the Media Gateway is the Serial Protocol Master Allowed Values 2 to 10 Default Value 7 INI File Parameter Name telSerCpidLen CPID Padding String Description Specifies the pad string to strip from the CPID fields calling and called parties in the incoming serial packet data Also used to pad extensions in MWI requests sent to the PBX from the Media Gateway This pad string must match the pad string configured by the PBX This parameter is only required when the Serial Protocol parameter is set to SMDI and the Media Gateway is the Serial Protocol Master Allowed Values String of up to 10 digits Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 14 7 3 14 8 3 14 9 3 14 10 Parameter Reference Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name telSerCpidPadStr Voice Mail Port Length Description Specifies the length of the field in the serial data packet that contains the voice mail port number that the call arrived or will arrive on This parameter is only required when the serial protocol is set to MD110 and the Media Gateway is the Serial Protocol Master Allowed Values 2 to 5 Default Value 2 INI File Parameter Name telSerVmpLen System Number Description Specifies the voice mail system that the serial protocol packet is being generated from This param
85. Central Office Seattle Office System Requirements Central Office PBX C n Calls between the New York City office and the Los Angeles office use the WAN Calls between the New York City office and the Seattle office use the PSTN Calls between the Los Angeles office and the Seattle office use the PSTN In New York and Los Angeles all inbound calls from the CO PSTN are routed to the local PBX In New York and Los Angeles all inbound calls from the WAN are routed to the local PBX These could be calls form other offices or other companies who all use the WAN System Setup New York City phones have extensions 1xxx Los Angeles phones have extensions 2xxx Seattle phones have extensions 3xxx New York City gateway is at 172 16 5 4 Los Angeles gateway is at 172 16 5 3 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 191 Routing Table Routing Requirements New York City Gateway 1 2 All inbound VoIP calls must be routed out the TDM span connected to the PBX All inbound TDM calls from the span connected to the CO must be routed out the TDM span connected to the PBX All inbound TDM calls from the span connected to the PBX and with a destination of 2xxx must be routed out the VoIP to the Los Angeles gateway 172 16 5 3 All other inbound TDM calls from the span connected to the PBX must be routed out
86. D information is available for the call within the prescribed time out This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not accessible through the Web interface Allowed Values Yes Media Gateway will generate this informational message No Media Gateway will not generate this informational message Default Value No INI File Parameter Name gwInformIfNoPbxCpid Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 18 3 Note 3 18 4 Note 3 18 5 Note 3 18 6 Note Parameter Reference Inform On No PBX CPID Time Phone Emulating Only Description Specifies the time in milliseconds that the Media Gateway will send the informational VoIP message indicating that no CPID is available for the call This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not accessible through the Web interface Allowed Values 1000 to 60000 milliseconds Default Value 4000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name gwInformIfNoPbxCpidMs ISDN Overlap Receive Minimum Digits Description Specifies the minimum number of called party digits that must be received on an inbound call before the inbound call is processed If the value is 0 then the call is processed immediately Applicable only when the switch is using overlap sending This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not accessible through the Web interface Allowed Values 0 to
87. Description Frequency 2 contained within the tone Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Note 3 15 1 6 Note 3 15 1 7 Note 3 15 1 8 Note 3 15 1 9 Note 3 15 1 10 Parameter Reference Allowed Values Number between 0 3000 A value of 0 means to ignore the entry INI File Parameter Name cpGenToneFreqHz2 This is a ini file parameter only Call Progress Tone Generation Frequency 3 Hz Description Frequency 3 contained within the tone Allowed Values Number between 0 3000 A value of 0 means to ignore the entry INI File Parameter Name cpGenToneFreqHz3 This is a ini file parameter only Call Progress Tone Generation Frequency 4 Hz Description Frequency 4 contained within the tone Allowed Values Number between 0 3000 A value of 0 means to ignore the entry INI File Parameter Name cpGenToneFreqHz4 This is a ini file parameter only Call Progress Tone Generation Amplitude 1 dBm Description Amplitude for frequency 1 Allowed Values Number between 80 3 INI File Parameter Name cpGenToneAmpDbm1 This is a ini file parameter only Call Progress Tone Generation Amplitude 2 dBm Description Amplitude for frequency 2 Allowed Values Number between 80 3 INI File Parameter Name cpGenToneAmpDbm2 This is a ini file parameter only Call Progress Tone Generation Amplitude 3 dBm Description Amplitude fo
88. Description The IP Port of the SIP Proxy Server If an IP Address was entered for the Primary Proxy Server Address parameter then the Primary Proxy Server Port parameter must be set to a valid port number Allowed Values 1024 65000 Default Value 5060 INI File Parameter Name sipProxyServerPort Backup Proxy Server Address Description The IP Address of the SIP Backup Proxy Server through which the Media Gateway may send receive requests If blank the Media Gateway will not use a Backup Proxy Server Allowed Values Any valid IP Address in dotted decimal notation Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name sipProxyServerAddr2 Backup Proxy Server Port Description The IP Port of the SIP Backup Proxy Server If an IP Address was entered for the Backup Proxy Server Address parameter then the Backup Proxy Server Port parameter must be set to a valid port number Allowed Values 1024 65000 Default Value 5060 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 3 5 5 Note 3 3 6 Parameter Reference INI File Parameter Name sipProxyServerPort2 Proxy Query Interval Description Interval in seconds at which the Primary Proxy Server is queried If the Primary Proxy Server does not respond to the query the Media Gateway will switch to the Backup Proxy Server Once the Primary Proxy Server responds to the query the Media Gateway will switch back to the Primary Proxy Se
89. Dialegic Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide November 2009 64 0346 07 Copyright and Legal Notice Copyright 2007 2009 Dialogic Corporation All Rights Reserved You may not reproduce this document in whole or in part without permission in writing from Dialogic Corporation at the address provided below All contents of this document are furnished for informational use only and are subject to change without notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Dialogic Corporation or its subsidiaries Dialogic Reasonable effort is made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained in the document However Dialogic does not warrant the accuracy of this information and cannot accept responsibility for errors inaccuracies or omissions that may be contained in this document INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH DIALOGIC PRODUCTS NO LICENSE EXPRESS OR IMPLIED BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN A SIGNED AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND DIALOGIC DIALOGIC ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DIALOGIC DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY RELATING TO SALE AND OR USE OF DIALOGIC PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE MERCHANTABILITY OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT OF A THIRD PARTY Dialogic products are not intended for use in medi
90. Dialog Box for Tdmlog wav File Download xi Do you want to open or saye this file Qi Name tdmlog wav Type Wave Sound From 172 16 3 48 pen Save While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially e harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this file what s the risk Important points to remember about TDM Capture are tis recommended to stop the trace first so the log file gets its header information written before downloading TDM capture occurs regardless of channel call state Capture times Rx only 48 minutes data into DMG2000 Rx amp Tx 24 minutes Downloading does not require any special software but viewing requires an audio viewer such as CoolEdit Pro or Adobe Audition not freeware 242 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 9 5 9 5 1 Diagnostics Downloading the TDM Capture clears the log and starts another Stopping the log and restarting clears the log Caution This operation is different from the other logs Communicating to the Terminal Interface Provided you have Admin level privileges you may communicate with the Media Gateway terminal interface by connecting to the serial interface DIAGNOSTICS connector on DMG1000 types and COM2 connector on DMG2000 types located on the rear panel or by establishing a telnet session via the LAN port Information in th
91. ES OF ADDED FEATURES If the Software is provided as an upgrade or added feature and the upgrade or added feature is an upgrade or added feature from another software product licensed to You and Your Authorized Users by Dialogic the upgrade or added feature is governed by the License Agreement earlier provided with that software product package and the present Agreement does not grant you additional license s THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Third party software e g drivers utilities operating system components etc which may be distributed with the Software or Product hereunder is provided AS IS without warranty of any kind whether express or implied including warranties of merchantability non infringement or fitness for a particular purpose and your use and installation thereof is also subject to the terms and conditions of any third party licenses which may be supplied with such software Some Software components may be subject to open source license provisions and Your use and further distribution of such Software is subject to the respective open source license under which it is provided Please see below for additional third party license information related to certain third party software Dialogic expressly disclaims liability of any kind with respect to your installation or use of third party software TERM This Agreement is effective until terminated You may terminate it at any time It will also terminate upon conditions set forth el
92. Group ISDN Signaling Mode T1 E1 Mode Group The parameters in the T1 E1 Mode group include the following Line Mode Signaling Mode Telephony Port Interface Side Line Mode Description Specifies the Line Mode type T1 or El to which the T1 E1 connector will be interfacing Allowed Values e T1 Interfaces to T1 line 23 24 channels e El Interfaces to El line 30 channels Default Value T1 INI File Parameter Name tlelLineMode Signaling Mode Description Specifies the signaling mode to be used Allowed Values e CAS Channel associated signaling ISDN Common channel signaling Default Value CAS INI File Parameter Name tlelSignaling Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 79 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 7 1 3 3 7 2 3 7 2 1 80 Telephony Port Interface Side Description Identifies the side of the connection Allowed Values Terminal Gateway uses recovered clock Network Gateway is clock master Default Value Terminal INI File Parameter Name telPortInterfaceSide T1 CAS Protocol Group T1 CAS Signaling Mode The parameters in the T1 CAS Protocol group include the following T1 CAS Protocol Flash Hook Wait for Dial Tone after Flash Hook Delay After Flash Hook Incoming Rings Before Answer Ringing Timeout Ring Cycle Time Enable Glare Detection Transfer Fe
93. HTTP over TLS HTTPS Allowed Values e Self Signed Use the self signed TLS certificate CA Signed Use the CA signed TLS certificate Default Value Self Signed INI File Parameter Name secSipTIsUseSelfSignedCert Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 121 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 17 Caution Caution 3 17 1 122 DSP Settings Parameters The DSP Settings parameters are included in the Configuration menu selections These parameters can be accessed instead by navigating to the DSP Settings link via the Web interface Modifying any of these parameters affects the digital signal processors and significantly changes the operation of the Media Gateway The DSP Settings configuration parameters should only be modified by advanced users of the Media Gateway You are strongly advised to backup your current configuration before proceeding See Section 2 6 1 Exporting Configuration Information on page 37 for additional information about backing up your configuration The DSP Settings group includes the following subgroups e DSP Advanced Settings e T 38 Fax Advanced Settings e Positive Answer Machine Detection DSP Advanced Settings The DSP Advanced Settings parameters include TDM to IP Gain Adjustment DMG1000 Only e IP to TDM Gain Adjustment DMG1000 Only Line Echo Cancellation DMG1000 Only
94. HTTPS SNMP Syslog and Telnet An administrator may choose to limit access to the management protocols based on the LAN interface This means that only certain networks and subnets can access them The management interface can be bound to LANI only LAN2 only or all LANs both LAN1 and LAN2 For example the management protocols may be configured to be accessible only on LAN2 This means that LAN1 would not be a management interface and the management protocols would not be accessible via LAN1 The protocols would only be accessible by accessing the gateway at the LAN2 IP address The management interface group includes the parameter IP Management Interface IP Management Interface Description Sets which LAN interface is accessible for management protocols Allowed Values LANI Management functionality available on LANI interface only LAN2 Management functionality available on LAN2 interface only Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference ALL Management functionality available on both LAN1 and LAN interfaces Default Value ALL INI File Parameter Name ipMgmt Note Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed 3 1 3 2 Advanced IP Route Rules A network device may only have one default network gateway address which receives transmitted IP packets that are not on the local subnet or do not match a custom routing rule However a single network gateway
95. IBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The license and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license including the GNU Public License Contractor manufacturer is DIALOGIC CORPORATION 9800 Cavendish Blvd Montreal Quebec Canada HAM 2V9 Contents Revision History 255 2 cc6 bene ec A eg ee GR URL RR eee 13 About This Publication cerrar ROT eee A ewe eee Rs 17 PUNPOSC 00 Sahin ees 17 Intended Audience 0 ete 17 How to Use This Publication 0 0 0 00 RII 17 Related Information 0 0 0 0 000 II eh 19 1 OVetVIeW o one cite deed ogee rr aaa beets 21 1 1 Product DescriptlOni ss isase sa giiia e be RECOR ERIS REN e E a ae PUR 21 14 1 Phone Emulating 12er basa eee ER Oe a IG Rer Eus 22 1 2 Call Routing in Phone Emulating Mode illsllels leere 26 1 2 1 Un Routable Calls lisse ne 26 1 3 Voice over IP Address Translation llle eee 27 1 44 Securty ceu beet A dane PE RAS ee ae ERES ad EE 28 1 4 1 Access Security c eicca dior da ea Rv 28 1 4 2 Data Security serris 0 rne 28 15 Web Interface sis cci eceweaos ede wb eem dee deeae depend A dawns 28 16 Online Help ied uo xx ER EU ERE hee Pe eee eee eens ER Ra oe ee wai 31 2 Media Gateway Configuration 0 0 00 cece 33 2 1 Setting the IP AddresS oo ooocccccccr rr
96. Inform On No PBX CPID Phone Emulating Only 2 020005 136 3 18 3 Inform On No PBX CPID Time Phone Emulating Only 137 3 18 4 ISDN Overlap Receive Minimum Digits 0 00 0 cee eee eee 137 3 18 5 ISDN Overlap Receive Timeout 0 00 eee 137 3 18 6 ISDN Service Class o renerion tei Ra a e tees 137 3 18 7 SIP Phone Context FrOM ssrira miari ccc 138 3 18 8 SIP Phone Context To 0 ccc ee 138 3 18 9 SIP User Phone Enabled o ooccccccccco eee 139 3 18 10 Start Port Tor RIP ois cia yak ete vad ded Te DAI eee 139 3 18 11 Unauthenticated SRTP Enable 0 0 00 ee 139 3 18 12 UnEncrypted SRTCP Enable o coccocccccc ees 140 3 18 13 UnEncrypted SRTP Enable 2 0 00 ccc eee 140 4 Call Progress Tones 141 4 1 Viewing and Editing Call Progress Tones 0000 c eee eee 141 4 2 Learning and Validating Call Progress ToneS 0 00 e eee eee eee 142 4 2 1 Learn Tone Web Page oooooooococrrcnnr eh 142 4 2 2 Learning the Characteristics of Unknown Call Progress Tones 144 4 2 3 Learn Tone Progress 6 0 cee eee eee 144 4 2 4 Learn Tone Results 0 0 0 cee eh 145 4 2 5 Validating Call Progress Tones ooococcccccocco 147 4 2 6 Validate Tone Progress ooer i encontar one a tenes 148 4 2 7 Validate Tone Results 0 0 c eee 148 5 ROULING Table bare ee A ee do m Ak es 151 5 1 Routing Table
97. L TLS Protocol Mutual TLS Authentication Required TLS Inactivity Timer Verify TLS Peer Certificate Date Verify TLS Peer Certificate Trust Verify TLS Peer Certificate Purpose TLS Transport Enabled Description Determines whether the TLS transport is enabled or disabled Allowed Values Yes TLS transport is enabled e No TLS transport is disabled Default Value No INI File Parameter Name sipTlsEnabled Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed TLS Server Port Description The Transport Layer Security TLS Port of the Media Gateway on which SIP TLS messages are sent received Allowed Values 1024 65000 Default Value 5061 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 59 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Note 3 3 4 3 Note 3 3 4 4 Note 3 3 4 5 60 INI File Parameter Name sipTlsServerPort Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed SSL TLS Protocol Description Specifies the default SSL record type to be used on TLS connections Allowed Values e SSLv3_TLSvl Connection will understand both the SSLv3 and TLSv1 protocols e SSLv3 Only Connection will only understand the SSLv3 protocol TLSv1_Only Connection will only understand the TLSv1 protocol Default Value SSLv3 TLSvI INI File Parameter Name secSipTIsProtocol Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Mutual TLS Authenti
98. L like expressions that define the incoming integration or text strings The configuration data may contain multiple rules each representing a different type of integration or display string in which the call party information exists in a different format either textual representation or delimited fields Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 199 Dialogic Corporation Media Gateway Parsers Figure 31 Sample Analog Type Il CPID Configuration Data in the adt File ATT System 25 rule 00 d 1 5 src_number 1 rule 00 d 1 5 d 1 5 src_number 1 dst_number 2 reason no answer rule 01 d 1 3 reason trunk rule 01 reason opening rule 01 reason opening rule 01 reason opening rule 02 d 1 5 d 1 5 src_number 1 dst_number 2 reason no answer rule 03 d 1 5 dst_number 1 reason no answer rule 04 d 1 3 reason trunk rule 05 d 0 10 d 0 10 reason disconnect 200 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Figure 32 Default Mitel Digital CPID Configuration Data cpid htm 6 2 1 CPID Parsing Rules Reason translations tran reason BUSY busy tran reason NO ANS no answer tran reason DO NOT DISTURB no answer tran reason ALWAYS fwd all tran reason FWD fwd all tran reason FORWARD fwd all tran reason FORWARDED fwd all tran reason default direct tran origin default internal time
99. Leave blank TLS Inactivity Timer Use default value TLS Server port Use default value e SIPS URI Scheme Enabled Yes e Cipher List Use default value Verify TLS Peer Certificate date No Verify TLS Peer Certificate trust No Secure Voice Data This section includes the following information about secure voice data Configuration e Secure Voice Data Examples Once a Voice over IP VoIP call is established voice data is transported in the form of RTP packets The voice data can be easily extracted from RTP packets and replayed using commercially available software SRTP adds security by encrypting voice data and authenticating packets The two parties involved in a conversation must be compatible in the sense that each party understands the other party s cipher requirements and supports them Configuration provides the following benefits e Support for more devices For example Media Gateway can talk to a device that supports either SHA1 32 bits authentication tag or SHA1 80 bits authentication tag Turn security on or off completely This allows the Media Gateway to talk to a device that doesn t support security at all Configuration Secure RTP SRTP includes the following configuration parameters SRIP Preference Values for this parameter are SRTP Only RTP Only or SRTP Preferred A single setting applies to all channels If SRTP Only is specified the gateway will only request secure audio and
100. Media Gateway HTTPS is now active SIP Call Control Security using TLS This section includes the following information about SIP Call Control security using TLS TLS Certificate Configuration e TLS Feature Configuration TLS Examples SIP is an application protocol used for VoIP call control SIP messages are used for call setup and tear down These messages contain information such as call party information call media type whether it is a secure call and if so what encryption algorithm is used etc The SIP protocol can be carried by UDP TCP or TLS transports Both UDP and TCP transport data in clear text As a result UDP and TCP can easily be monitored by third party hackers TLS on the other hand carries SIP data in a secure way by encrypting the data and authenticating the transport connections Authentication guarantees that you are talking to the intended peer Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 207 Dialogic Corporation Data Security 7 3 1 7 3 2 208 TLS Certificate Configuration A TLS certificate can be self signed or certificate authority CA signed A self signed certificate can be generated by the Media Gateway CA signed certificates must be requested by the Media Gateway and signed by a CA When using a self signed certificate The Media Gateway generates a certificate which will be installed on VoIP devices that will communicate with the Media Gateway via TLS When usin
101. Media Gateway using the gateway prefix configured on the Media Gateway Security The Media Gateway supports two kinds of security Access Security e Data Security Access Security Access to the Media Gateway is secured by requiring a user name and password to login to the gateway The user name and password are required for all interfaces of the Media Gateway Web interface serial interface and telnet interface Data Security Data security for the Media Gateway includes the use of various secure protocols when transmitting and receiving data The Media Gateway supports security for three types of data HTTP security Data transmitted between the Media Gateway and a Web browser To secure HTTP the Media Gateway uses HTTPS protocol Call Control security Data used to setup and tear down a call To secure Call Control the Media Gateway uses Transport Layer Security TLS on top of SIP Voice security The actual conversation once a call is connected To secure voice the Media Gateway uses SRTP Because for security the HTTPS and TLS protocols also require digital identity certificates e g public key certificates Certificate Configuration and Management is also provided by the Media Gateway For additional information about how the Media Gateway supports security see Chapter 7 Data Security Web Interface The Web interface is accessed from a workstation on the Ethernet connected to the LAN conne
102. N Access for Virtual Private Network e Megacom 800 MEGACOM 800 telecommunications service Megacom MEGACOM telecommunications service Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 7 3 8 Notes 3 7 3 9 Note Parameter Reference e Accunet ACCUNET Switched Digital Services Long Distance International Long Distance Service e International_800 International 800 e Private Private Virtual Network MultiQuest AT amp T DIAL IT 900 and MultiQuest INWATS National ISDN INWATS Hotel Motel Hotel Motel Service Selection Default Value None INI File Parameter Name t1IsdnNsfleServices ISDN Answer Supervision Enable Description If Yes and an outbound call receives a Progress Indicator with a 1 or 8 non ISDN inband then the gateway will use in band answer supervision to determine when the call has been answered If No then a received CONNECT message will be used to determine when the call has been answered 1 Progress Indicator 1 Call is not end to end ISDN or may be in band information 2 Progress Indicator 8 Inband treatment has been applied Allowed Values Yes No Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name isdnAnswerSupervisionEnable Enable Failover Description Specifies the Failover mode used when the gateway is powered down This parameter is only applicable for DMG2060DTISQ and DMG2120DTISQ models Allowed Values e Yes
103. ON MAY NOT BE APPLICABLE US GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS The Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the US Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR52 227 14 and DFAR252 227 7013 et seq or its successor Use of the Software by the Government constitutes acknowledgement of Dialogic s proprietary rights therein EXPORT CONTROL You agree to comply with all export laws and restrictions and regulations of the Canada the United States and other applicable governments as well as their agencies or authorities and not to export or re export the Software or any direct product thereof in violation of any such restrictions laws or regulations or without all necessary approvals By downloading or using the Software You agree to the foregoing and represent and warrant that You comply with these conditions High Risk Activities The Software is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as on line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of the Software could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage High Risk Activities Accordingly Dialogic its subsidiaries and its suppliers specifically dis
104. Overview sssssssee mr 151 5 41 VoIP to TOM CalSci sr e Aa da 151 51 2 TDM to VOIP GallS vaciando arrasa 152 5 2 Router Configuratio Mie e ss a ws aa REY Y E E E A 152 5 2 1 Determining the Call Destination 0 0 ccc eee 153 5 2 2 Inbound TDM Call Routing Rules ills 154 5 2 8 Inbound VoIP Call Routing Rules lille 159 5 2 4 TDM Trunk Groups sese ugue hup mele dana Wate ie EV 165 5 2 5 VOoIP HOSEGFEOUDS rcs eredi esr Rene te n Ee Pd 167 5 35 Offline Testing x ze sie rx X Le Se IR beets E beta whee el sre 169 5 4 Call Routing Examples sssssesee hr 170 6 Media Gateway Parsers iiisliisillslseellee rn 197 6 1 Configuration Options n ei sibus thecihcetupoeseihunnv e dy eth Pen Ra4su herbe 197 6 2 Parsing Configuration Syntax 0 0 ren 198 6 2 1 Display Translation Descriptors 0 0 00 eee 201 6 2 2 gt Call Class RUE his a i ete ex et A hie Aenea ie eee RE 202 7 Data Security 22 400 A ae ee tnd Wa lesa A heey ned eee s 205 7 1 Data Security Overview 0 0 0 eet 205 2 Secure MP deta e es SD a i 205 7 2 1 HTTPS Certificate Configuration 0 0000 cee 206 7 2 2 HTTPS Example 000 hne 207 7 3 SIP Call Control Security using TLS 0000 ee 207 7 3 1 TLS Certificate Configuration u a asaan 208 7 3 2 TLS Feature Configuration lile 208 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Seri
105. P Transport Mode 70 Flash Hook 81 94 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 261 Dialogic Corporation Framing El 90 Framing T1 87 Gateway Address 47 Host and Domain Name 54 HTTPS Certificate Type 121 Hunt Group Extension 78 ID 115 Inband CPID Complete Timeout 85 99 Inband Type I CID to First Ring Timeout 86 Incoming Rings Before Answer 82 95 Incompatible Message STATUS 136 Inform On No PBX CPID 136 Inform On No PBX CPID Time 137 Initial Wait for Inband CPID 85 99 Invite Expiration 55 IP Address of Serial Server 113 IP Management Interface 44 IP to PCM AGC Enable 128 IP to PCM AGC Max Gain 129 IP to PCM AGC Min Gain 129 IP to PCM AGC Slew Rate 128 IP to PCM AGC Target Level 128 IP to TDM Gain Adjustment 123 ISDN Answer Supervision Enable E1 93 ISDN Answer Supervision Enable T1 89 ISDN Overlap Receive Minimum Digits 137 ISDN Overlap Receive Timeout 137 ISDN Protocol E1 91 ISDN Protocol T1 87 ISDN Protocol Variant E1 91 ISDN Protocol Variant T1 88 ISDN Service Class 137 Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period 127 Jitter Buffer Deletion Threshold 127 Jitter Buffer Frame Deletion Mode 128 Jitter Buffer Initial Delay 127 Jitter Buffer Maximum Delay 127 Jitter Buffer Minimum Delay 126 Key Derivation Enable 71 Key Derivation Rate 71 Line Coding E1 90 Line Echo Cancellation 123 Line Echo Cancellation NLP 124 Line Encoding T1 86 Line Mode 79 Loop Current Off Debounce 9
106. Purpose ntended Audience How to Use This Publication Related Information Purpose This document provides information about installing configuring operating and maintaining the Dialogic Media Gateway Intended Audience This information is intended for Distributors e System Integrators Value Added Resellers VARs Original Equipment Manufacturers OEMs How to Use This Publication This information is organized as follows Chapter 1 Overview provides a description of the product and discusses call routing address translation and the Web interface Chapter 2 Media Gateway Configuration provides procedures for configuring and upgrading the Media Gateway Chapter 3 Parameter Reference lists the Media Gateway parameters that can be configured from the Web interface Chapter 4 Call Progress Tones describes how to view edit learn and validate call progress tones from the Web interface Chapter 5 Routing Table describes a set of rules used to define the characteristics of a call routed through the Media Gateway Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 17 Dialogic Corporation About This Publication 18 Note Chapter 6 Media Gateway Parsers describes the Media Gateway in band Type I on hook and Type II off hook integration parsers for analog units and the display parser for digital units These parsers allow the user to define the meaning
107. R 235 DAD OVEMIEW ida ca e A o b a cg dd a a 235 9 4 2 Trace Capture eed eb aa BR Crede P rx 236 9 43 Network Capture sner cracio ia kanae d ehh rn 239 9 4 4 TDM Capture tech CREER a eee da he ek uu ER E 241 9 5 Communicating to the Terminal Interface llle 243 9 5 1 Connecting to Terminal Interface Via DIAGNOSTICS Connector 243 9 5 2 Connecting to Terminal Interface Via LAN Connector 000 244 9 6 Trace Mechanism ce ie ET he a highend EX RETE au e RE E duree PURA 244 961 Trace Format ss sepes d been freee eile E bein eee uu E i 245 9 6 2 Trace Utility oz cordi RERO RES EP PUES eile ve un EEG Ms 245 963 Lrace Gommards sass cess eiu ue scr e Rose Ra 248 9 6 4 Examples of Trace Commands and Displays isses sess 250 9 7 Diagnostic Commands t aa E hh 255 9 7 1 DevstatCOMMAand ooo ooooooc ene eens 255 9 7 2 Restat Command sii a os tee a a eee BA ees 255 9 7 3 Ping COMME A IMP ERE 255 974 Mer Command sesso ia a S Eae e Dae bb ALS e RE abs 256 9 7 5 Alarm ListCOMMAand ooooocoococ ee 256 Index soccer EE eru eta arde edebat e Eee PE ard 257 8 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Figures 1 Typical IP Gateway Phone Emulating Topology PBX Connection 23 2 Typical IP Gateway Phone Emulating Topology PSTN Connection 23 3 IP Gateway Using Serial Link
108. Required blue box in the upper left hand corner of the screen 6 If a restart is required click on Restart on the System screen or select Restart from the Configuration menu When the Restart Web page appears click on Restart Unit Now or Restart Unit When Idle to restart the Media Gateway See Section 2 5 Restart Options on page 36 N oo Once the system completes its initialization after approximately one minute select Refresh from the Web Browser View Menu You must now log on to the system again After logging on the Summary screen will appear You may now select any item from the Status or Configuration menu Restart Options Selecting Restart from a configuration screen or selecting Restart from the Configuration menu brings up the Restart Web page which allows you to restart the Media Gateway Restarting the unit is required when certain parameter values are changed You have two options to choose from when restating the unit Restart Unit Now Clicking this button will cause the unit to restart immediately Restart Unit When Idle Clicking this button will delay the unit from restarting until the unit is considered in the idle state In the idle state there are no calls incoming outgoing or connected on any of the PBX ports of the Media Gateway By selecting this option you will schedule a restart time that minimizes the effect the restart will have on call traffic through the unit Im
109. Status ooococcoccoccnoa 232 TDM Self Verification Test Status Web Page ooccoccoccoccn eee ee 232 TDM Self Verification Test Results nanunua ccc nn 233 TDM Self Verification Call Log Web Page 000 cece tee 235 Diagnostic Web Page ooooccooocc rh mr mun 236 Trace Capture Control Page DMG2000 1 2 2 2 cee 237 Example of a Running Log Trace Capture 0 0c cee 238 File Download Dialog Box for Trace log 1 0 tee 238 Network Capture Control Page DMG2000 0 ee 239 Example of Running Log Network Capture 0000 0c eee eee 240 File Download Dialog Box for Iplog pcap ossasuna aaan 240 TDM Capture Control Web Page 060 ccc cette 241 Example of Running Log TDM Capture 000000 tee 242 File Download Dialog Box for Tdmlog wav 0 0 cece ee 242 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Tables 1 Coder Decoder ParameterS oooooccooco eren 69 2 Syntax for Number Matching 00 ce es 104 3 Default Number Plan 0 0 00 m unn 105 4 Default Number Type 0 00 cc re m ren 105 5 Syntax for Number Matching lslslssee e es 106 6 Default Number PlaDN ooooccoococnnon eet eet eee 106 7 Default Number Type 0000 cece ete I tees 107 8 Syntax Used for CPID Matching 0 0000 cece 155 9 Syntax Used for CPID Manipulation 0 0
110. TLS Peer Certificate Purpose 61 Verify TLS Peer Certificate Trust 61 Voice Activity Detection 68 Voice Activity Noise Floor 124 Voice Mail Port Len 113 VoIP Host Monitor Interval 65 Wait for Dial Tone after Flash Hook 81 Wait for Ringback Connect on Blind Transfer 77 parsers 197 configuration options 197 205 parsing configuration syntax 198 parsing call class rules 202 display translation descriptors 201 password changing 35 Password Web page 31 35 phone emulating 22 ping command 255 procedures basic configuration via the serial port 34 changing the password 35 configuring the IP Media Gateway 35 exporting configuration information 37 importing configuration information 38 setting the IP address 33 upgrading the software 38 product description 21 Q Quality of Service Subgroup 70 73 264 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation R reason tokens 204 regular expressions 202 restart command 255 Restart Web page 31 36 rule order 204 tule syntax 203 S Serial Port COM1 Group parameters 107 Serial Port COM2 Group parameters 109 Serial Protocol parameters 110 Serial Protocol Web page 30 Session Initiation Protocol parameters 53 setting the IP address 33 SIP parameters 53 software upgrading 38 status alarm information 216 call log information 216 MIB II information 217 summary information 215 telephony information 217 version information 218 s
111. Ta Destination DM ia Group Fractional T1 y CPID Calling Called Redirect Number Number Number Called Redirect Select Primary Alternate Route 9 Primary Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 4 Add Altemate Route Calling Number The formula as specified in the section above that determines the calling number of the outgoing call Calling Name The formula as specified in the section above that determines the calling name of the outgoing call Called Number The formula as specified in the section above that determines the called number of the outgoing call Called Name The formula as specified in the section above that determines the called name of the outgoing call Redirect Number The formula as specified in the section above that determines the redirect number of the outgoing call Redirect Name The formula as specified in the section above that determines the redirect name of the outgoing call 164 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Note Routing Table Select Primary Alternate Route One Primary and multiple Alternate routes may be defined for a given routing rule if the gateway is unable to route the request to the Primary The Alternate routes will then be attempted until the request is successfully routed or if there are no more Alternate routes to try The Primary and Alternate routes differ only in the Outbound Routes section All other parts
112. ace diagnostic tool is a Web based user application that can be used to provide verification of TDM compatibility or troubleshoot the TDM interface of the Media Gateway 9 2 1 1 Features Currently the TDM interface diagnostic provides the ability to Originate a TDM call to a specified endpoint address and verify endpoint response e Send a message waiting notification status update request and verify endpoint response 9 2 1 2 Location The TDM interface diagnostic tool is only part of the suite of diagnostic utilities that can be used to assist in recording testing and resolving configuration or compatibility issues 222 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 9 2 2 Diagnostics The Media Gateway diagnostic utilities are accessible via the Web interface by selecting the Diagnostics link on the left side menu of any Web page TDM Interface Test Operation To operate the TDM interface diagnostic tool the user must first navigate to the Tests gt TDM link via the Media Gateway s user interface In the TDM Interface Test Configuration table 1 Choose the diagnostic test to perform by selecting one of the options in the Test Selection field The user must fill in the Destination Number field of the TDM endpoint that the diagnostic test will use when attempting to establish a connection Optionally select the interface and channel index of the gateway to use in the di
113. age Figure 46 TDM Self Verification Call Log Web Page ID Start Time End Time Source End Reason Inbound info Outbound info 1 2 21 9 13 00 From Test A 2 21 9 12 59 2 21 9 12 57 6 2008 2 21 9 12 56 00 N m elo olo 00 9 un ov NJN olo olo 00 2 21 9 12 55 2 21 9 12 53 2 21 9 12 52 4 2008 2 21 9 12 50 2 21 9 12 49 2 2008 7 un N e e eo 5 N o o 5 3 N N e e Co 11 o 2 21 9 12 43 2 21 9 12 45 From TDM Network TOM Normal 2 2003 gt gt Rsn Direa 2 21 9 12 33 2 21 9 12 45 From TDM Network TOM Normal 1 2003 gt gt Rsn Direct 2 21 9 12 31 2 21 9 12 29 2 21 9 12 31 From TDM Network TOM Normal 1 2001 gt gt Ren Direct __ 2 21 9 12 19 2 21 9 12 31 From TDM Network TOM Normal 4 2001 gt gt Rsn Direct __ gt gt Rene a N 2 21 9 12 18 2 21 9 12 15 2 21 9 12 05 2000 gt 2001 gt Rsn Direct 1 1 2001 2 21 9 12 48 2 21 9 12 49 From Test App TDM Normal Mwi Set 2001 gt 2008 2 21 9 12 46 2 21 9 12 48 TDM Normal Mwi Clear 2000 gt 2008 1 2008 2 21 9 12 45 2 21 9 12 46 TDM Normal Mwi Set 2000 gt 2008 1 2008 9 4 Diagnostic Logging The following is an overview describing the diagnostic logging capabilities of the Media Gateway and includes the following sections Overview Trace Capture Network Capture TDM Capture 9 4 1 Overview The Media Gateway p
114. age Learn Tone Results When the Media Gateway has finished learning the tones a results page is displayed The learned tones are grouped into the following possible tone results on the Web page Tone Errors e Existing Tones Unique Tones Conflicting Tones After selecting the tones to be added to the tone definition table the Apply button adds the selected tones to the tone definition table The Manual Tones Web page discussed in Section 4 1 Viewing and Editing Call Progress Tones on page 141 can then be used to view the newly learned tones Tone Errors An error occurred when trying to learn the tones listed in this section These tones cannot be added to the configuration due to the error encountered Possible reasons for error as well as possible action include the following No data The Gateway dialed the destination address but there was silence on the line and no data could be collected Action Verify the destination address Not enough data The Gateway dialed the destination address but the data collected was not enough to extract tone characteristics Action Verify the destination address and ensure that the destination does not forward to another extension or that the destination is not answered Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 145 Dialogic Corporation Call Progress Tones 146 Note Failed Validation unexpected CP tone The Gateway dialed the destination address and was ab
115. agnostic test by choosing the Interface Selection or Channel Selection If Automatic is chosen the test will select the first interface and channel available Fill in any optional source party information Source Name and Source Number that will be delivered to the destination endpoint during the diagnostic test If the message waiting diagnostic test is selected choose the Messages Waiting Status to be used in the message waiting notification request To start the specified diagnostic test press the Start Test button on the Web page Executing the TDM interface diagnostic tool temporarily disables gateway functionality Any active connections will be released Figure 37 TDM Interface Web Page TDM Test Configuration Pe mem M Fees ime o seme um ear O CT E EXT E Test Results Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 223 Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics 9 2 2 1 Configuration Options The following configuration items are available to be modified by the user Test Selection Choose the type of diagnostic test to perform Available options are Initiate Call and Send Message Waiting Status Interface Selection Select the specific interface to use in the diagnostic test If a specific interface is not chosen the test will select the first interface available Channel Selection Select the specific interface to use in the diagnostic test If a specific interface is not chosen t
116. al but if you do not use a catch all rule any inbound VoIP calls that do not match a rule are dropped Inbound VoIP Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Originating VoIP Host Address X Country Code One 1 Any X Other Country Codes Any ii X Catch AII Any i Inbound VoIP Request Matching CPID Matching Calling x Called 0 Redirect f Number Number Number Calling i Called x Redirect f Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection Outbound Trunk Destination ZUM Group Any EDM channel CPID Manipulation Calling S Called D Redirect R Number Number Number Calling Called Redirect Name B Name B Name Li Select Primary Alternate Route e Primary o Al 1 o Alt 2 o Alt 3 o Alt4 Notes 1 Since this rule is last it matches any called number that does not start with a plus sign Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 183 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table 6 Validate the Routing Table e For Inbound TDM CPID of the form 1 YY Yxxxxxxx is changed to 1 YY Yxxxxxxx Input Output 184 Inbound Route e Inbound TDM o Inbound VoIP Request Type Call Port 1 Channel 1 Calling Number 5553000 Calling Name Called Number 9145552345 Called Name Redirect Numb
117. alking to an IP phone that requires security and supports the following e Cipher AES Counter Mode Authentication SHA1 32 bits or 80 bits e MKI Not supported KDR Not supported Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 211 Dialogic Corporation Data Security The Media Gateway should be configured as follows SRTP Preference SRTP Only Cipher Mode AES Counter Mode Authentication Type SHA1 Authentication Tag Length SHA1 32 bits or 80 bits Master Key Index MKT on Transmit Stream No Key Derivation Enable No Key Derivation Rate KDR Not applicable Example 2 In this example the Media Gateway is talking to an IP phone that does not support security SRTP Preference RTP Only Master Key Index MKI on Transmit Stream Not applicable Key Derivation Enable Not applicable Key Derivation Rate KDR Not applicable Anti replay window size hint Not Applicable Cipher Mode Not applicable Authentication Type Not applicable Authentication Tag Length Not applicable 7 5 Installing Certificate Using Internet Explorer This section describes the procedure for installing a certificate using Internet Explorer Perform the following steps 1 O oon NHN Bb UUN ja o 212 Obtain a copy of the certificate that has already been installed or generated on the Media Gateway Launch Internet Explorer Select Tools gt Internet Options from the Internet Explorer menu Select the C
118. art if this parameter value is changed HTTPs Server Enabled Description Defines whether the HTTPs Server is enabled or disabled Disable the HTTP Server to disable non secure Web access Allowed Values Yes HTTPs Server is enabled e No HTTPs Server is disabled Default Value No INI File Parameter Name webHttpsEnabled Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Telnet Server Group The Telnet Server subgroup includes the following parameter Telnet Server Enabled Telnet Server Enabled Description Defines whether the Telnet Server is enabled Disable the Telnet Server to prevent any Telnet connections to the Media Gateway Allowed Values Yes No Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name telnetEnabled Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed VoIP General Parameters The VoIP General parameters include the following groups e User Agent Group e Server Group e TCP UDP Group Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 53 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 3 1 3 3 1 1 Note 3 3 1 2 3 3 1 3 54 TLS Group Proxy Group Timing Group Monitoring Group User Agent Group The User Agent group includes the following parameters Host and Domain Name Transport Type Call as Domain Name SIPS URI Scheme Enabled Invite Expiration Reliable Provisional Responses Host and Domain Name D
119. ature Code Consult Call Dialtone Drop Code Consult Call Proceeding Drop Code Consult Call Busy Drop Code Consult Call Connected Drop Code Consult Call Disconnected Drop Code Consult Call Error Drop Code MWI Confirmation Tone Use Same Port for MWI Clear Set Initial Wait for Inband CPID Inband CPID Complete Timeout Inband Type I CID to First Ring Timeout T1 CAS Protocol Description If T1 CAS is selected as the Signaling Mode specifies the T1 CAS protocol to be used Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 7 2 2 3 7 2 3 3 7 2 4 Note Parameter Reference Allowed Values Loop Start Loop Start protocol will be used Ground Start Ground Start protocol will be used E amp M Immediate E amp M Immediate protocol will be used E amp M Delay E amp M Delay protocol will be used E amp M Wink E amp M Wink protocol will be used Default Value Loop Start INI File Parameter Name t1el CASProtocol Flash Hook Description Specifies the duration in milliseconds that the Media Gateway will remain on hook during a hook flash operation Allowed Values 50 to 4000 milliseconds Default Value 500 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telFlashMs Wait for Dial Tone after Flash Hook Description Indicate if the gateway should wait for dial tone after flash hook Allowed Values Yes Gateway will wait for dial tone after a Flash Hook as a confirma
120. ault Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Gateway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flash operation INI File Parameter Name telFacCDropDt Consult Call Proceeding Drop Code Description Defines the Feature Code to dial in order to drop a Consult call that is in the Proceeding state dialed but not connected and to reconnect to the original call Allowed Values A string from 0 to 10 digits in length using any of the following characters 0 9 K Default Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Gateway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flash operation INI File Parameter Name telFacCDropProc Consult Call Busy Drop Code Description Defines the Feature Code to dial in order to drop a Consult call that is in the Busy state and to reconnect to the original call Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 83 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Note 3 7 2 13 Note 3 7 2 14 Note 3 7 2 15 84 Note Allowed Values A string from 0 to 10 digits in length using any of the following characters 0 9 EH Default Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Gateway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flash operation INI File Parameter Name telFacCDropBusy C
121. band DTMF digit to arrive If no digit is received within this time the CPID is assumed to be complete Allowed Values 100 to 2000 milliseconds Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 85 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 7 2 20 Note 3 7 3 3 7 3 1 86 Default Value 300 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telInbCpidEndMs Inband Type I CID to First Ring Timeout Description Specifies the number of milliseconds that are allowed from the end of the Type I CPID on the first ring If this time is exceeded the CPID is cleared This parameter is only needed when CPID arrives at the Gateway before the first ring This parameter can be ignored if the CPID arrives between the first and second ring Allowed Values 500 to 30000 milliseconds Default Value 2000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telPreRingDtmfCidTimeoutMs T1 ISDN Protocol Group ISDN Signaling Mode The parameters in the T1 ISDN Protocol group include the following Line Encoding Framing e Selects Transmit Pulse Waveform ISDN Protocol SDN Protocol Variant Multiple Diversion Processing Network Specific Facilities NSF ISDN Answer Supervision Enable Enable Failover Line Encoding Description Specifies the type of T1 line encoding that will be used Allowed Values AMI Alternate Mark Inversion line coding is used e B8ZS Binary Eight Zero Substitution line coding is used Defa
122. based user application that can be used to provide verification of VoIP compatibility or troubleshoot the VoIP interface of the Media Gateway Features Currently the VoIP interface diagnostic provides the ability to Originate a VoIP call to a specified endpoint address and verify endpoint response e Send a message waiting notification status update request and verify endpoint response Location The VoIP interface diagnostic tool is only part of the suite of diagnostic utilities that can be used to assist in recording testing and resolving configuration or compatibility issues The Media Gateway diagnostic utilities are accessible via the Web interface by selecting the Diagnostics link on the left side menu of any Web page Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 219 Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics 9 1 2 VoIP Interface Test Operation To operate the VoIP interface diagnostic tool the user must first navigate to the Tests gt VoIP link via the Media Gateway s user interface In the VoIP Interface Test Configuration table 1 Choose the diagnostic test to perform by selecting one of the options in the Test Selection field 2 Then the user must fill in the Destination VoIP Address field of the VoIP endpoint that the diagnostic test will use when attempting to establish a connection 3 Fill in any optional source party information Source Name and Source Number that will be delivered to the destina
123. ber Abbreviated Reserved Table 7 Default Number Type All Unknown TDM CPID Parsing Configuration The TDM CPID Parsing Configuration data is included for T1 CAS in the DMG2000 unit and in the Analog DMG1000 unit For other models this data can be accessed instead by navigating to the TDM gt CPID Parsing link via the Web interface Modifying this data affects the display parsing of the Media Gateway The TDM CPID Parsing Configuration data should only be modified by advanced users of the Media Gateway You are strongly advised to backup your current configuration before proceeding See Section 2 6 1 Exporting Configuration Information on page 37 for additional information about backing up your configuration The text box on this page can be easily modified by either pasting parsing rules into it from a text file or directly modifying the contents of the control See Chapter 6 Media Gateway Parsers for further information on the creation and use of parsing rules INI File Parameter Name CPID RULES Serial Ports Parameters The following parameters are in the Serial Ports group e Serial Port COMI Group e Serial Port COM2 Group DMG2000 Only Serial Port COM1 Group The Serial Port COMI group parameters are used to configure the DMG1000 serial interface port DIAGNOSTICS connector and the DMG2000 COMI port connector The system parameters in the Serial Port group include Serial Port Baud
124. bpages include e System Provides general Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP agent information including description object ID up time contact information node name node location and the type of services offered From the System Web subpage you can download the Media Gateway MIB file dmg mib Interfaces Provides Ethernet interface descriptions including type speed physical address and statistic counters e IP Lists counters and address tables for the Internet Protocol IP layer CMP Provides Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packet and error counter information TCP Provides information about the Transmission Control Protocol TCP counters and connection table UDP Provides information about the User Datagram Protocol UDP counters and local listener table SNMP Records error statistics for SNMP protocol datagrams For more information on SNMP Agent Supported MIBs and Alarms refer to the SNMP Application Note at http www dialogic com manuals mediagateway SNMP_AppNote_6x pdf Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 217 Dialogic Corporation Unit Status 8 6 8 7 218 Note Version Information Selecting Version from the Status menu displays version information about the Media Gateway software and hardware The firmware version information displayed will vary depending on the Media Gateway model Version information includes the following
125. button and drag the row up or down Rule Label Specifies name of the call type rule Calling Number Match Each CPID Matching rule must use the following syntax Table 2 Syntax for Number Matching Token Description lt Matches all 0123456789 Identifies a specific digit digit digit Specifies a range of digit strings x Matches any single digit Matches any number of ending digits Calling Number Plan Numbering Plan for the calling party information Initially the value will be default which will set an appropriate value for the number plan depending on the calling number Allowed Values Default Unknown ISDN E 164 Data X 121 Telex F 69 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference e Standard e Private Reserved Table 3 Default Number Plan NI 2 DMS 100 5ESS Length 7 ISDN_E 164 Length 10 ISDN_E 164 All other lengths Unknown QSIG ETSI All number lengths Unknown Calling Number Type Number Type for the calling party information The user must select matching number type according to the selected number plan If the value is set to default the gateway will set an appropriate value depending on the calling number Allowed Values Default Unknown International National Network e Subscriber e Abbreviated Table 4 Default Number Type
126. c rule that provides the best possibility of extracting the desired information from the integration string Reason Tokens The reason token specified in a rule is translated by the DMG1000 into corresponding IP call information The following reason token strings specified in a rule are recognized by the DMG1000 Table 15 Parser Reason Codes Reason String Used by Media Gateway no answer Call is tagged as a forwarded on no answer call busy Call is tagged as a forwarded on busy call direct Call is tagged as a direct call fwd all Call is tagged as a forwarded all call disconnect Call is disconnected Any other call reason token specified in a rule will cause the Media Gateway to ignore the received string if the received string matches the rule Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 7 1 7 2 Data Security 7 Information about data security and how it is supported by the Dialogic Media Gateway is described in the following sections Data Security OVOLVIBW cio AR d Ry Gee eer REY eps 205 Uup dj rcr rcc DIT 205 SP Call Control Security using TLS soii ir 207 Sepe Vince DEus pecar 210 Installing Certificate Using Internet Explotet os socoe secte eser Res 212 Data Security Overview Data security on the Media Gateway includes the use of various secure protocols when transmitting and receiving data The Media Gateway secures three typ
127. c Corporation Routing Table 6 Validate Routing Table The Routing Table can be validated using the Tests gt Router web page e Navigate to Tests gt Router and enter data as per the following table Inbound Route e Inbound TDM o Inbound VoIP Request Type Call Port 1 Channel 1 Calling Number 156 Calling Name Bill Called Number 213 Called Name Mary Redirect Number Redirect Name e Click on Simulate Route The Test Results table bottom of page should be filled in as follows Test Results Results Test Passed Reason Inbound Rule All Inbound TDM Outbound Group All To 172 13 4 3 e The Outbound Route table should be filled in as follows Outbound Route VoIP Device Bridged Method 172 13 4 3 Host 0 IP Port 156 Calling Number Bill Calling Name 213 Called Number Mary Called Name Redirect Number Redirect Name e Try several more Inbound Routes varying the Request Type Port and Channel Since all Inbound TDM are routed using the same rule the Outbound Route should be the same e Now test the Inbound VoIP Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Input Output Notes Inbound Route o Inbound TDM e Inbound VoIP Request Type Call Host 172 13 4
128. cal life saving life sustaining critical control or safety systems or in nuclear facility applications Due to differing national regulations and approval requirements certain Dialogic products may be suitable for use only in specific countries and thus may not function properly in other countries You are responsible for ensuring that your use of such products occurs only in the countries where such use is suitable For information on specific products contact Dialogic Corporation at the address indicated below or on the web at www dialogic com It is possible that the use or implementation of any one of the concepts applications or ideas described in this document in marketing collateral produced by or on web pages maintained by Dialogic may infringe one or more patents or other intellectual property rights owned by third parties Dialogic does not provide any intellectual property licenses with the sale of Dialogic products other than a license to use such product in accordance with intellectual property owned or validly licensed by Dialogic and no such licenses are provided except pursuant to a signed agreement with Dialogic More detailed information about such intellectual property is available from Dialogic s legal department at 9800 Cavendish Blvd 5th Floor Montreal Quebec Canada H4M 2V9 Dialogic encourages all users of its products to procure all necessary intellectual property licenses required to implement any concepts or applications
129. cation Required Description If Yes is selected the SIP client sends a certificate to the peer server and the SIP server will send a certificate request to the client The certificate received from the client is validated If the client does not provide a valid certificate the server will close the session If No is selected the SIP server does not send a client certificate request to the client and the client does not send a certificate to the server A certificate received from the client is ignored by the server Allowed Values Yes SIP client sends certificate to peer server and SIP server sends certificate request to client e No SIP server does not send client a certificate request and client does not send a certificate to the server Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name sipTlsMutualAuthentication Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed TLS Inactivity Timer Description Number of seconds after which an idle Transport Layer Security TLS connection will be closed Allowed Values 10 60000 seconds Default Value 30 seconds Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference INI File Parameter Name sipTIsInactivitySec 3 3 4 6 Verify TLS Peer Certificate Date Description Determines whether the TLS peer s certificate date is validated This requires that the Media Gateway has already received the network time via SNTP Al
130. ce Destination Mask Description Destination IP mask that is combined with the destination address to define the subnet range for the route Allowed Values Any valid IP mask Default Value blank INI File Parameter Name ipRouteMask Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Gateway Address Description IP address of the gateway router that receives all IP packets from the LAN that match this route The gateway IP address must be in the same subnet as the route s LAN interface Allowed Values Any valid IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value blank INI File Parameter Name ipRouteGw Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Management Protocols Parameters The Management Protocols group includes the following subgroups e E Mail Group e SysLog Group e SNMP Group Web Server Group Telnet Server Group E Mail Group The E Mail subgroup includes the following parameters E Mail Alarms Enabled E Mail Minimum Alarm Severity Destination E Mail List E Mail Server IP Address e Source E Mail Address Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 47 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 48 E Mail Alarms Enabled Description Defines whether an e mail is generated to signal an alarm Allowed Values Yes E mail is generated No E mail is not generated Default Value No INI File Parameter Name emailEnabled E Mail Mi
131. ce initialization 1 Alarm Alarms 1 Event Hookswitch Lamps Tones Displays Button Presses Stat Statistics 1 System starts with these enabled on all trace keys 9 6 3 Trace Commands The trace commands include the following e trace show e trace default e trace trace key trace typelall gt lt onloff gt trace all trace typelall gt lt onloff gt trace trace keylall gt reset trace all off trace port 1 based port numberlall gt lt onloff gt trace time lt onloff gt e trace l 9 6 3 1 trace show The trace show command displays the trace levels of all trace modules and port related trace settings The following is an example of a trace show display PIMG gt trace show Key Traces System Error Init Debug Cfg Error Init Debug Tel Error Init Debug DspIf Error Init Debug DspRoot Error Init Debug EthMgr Error Init Debug Arp Error Init Debug Web Error Init Debug Alarm Error Init Debug 248 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 9 6 3 2 9 6 3 3 9 6 3 4 Diagnostics Pbn Error Init Debug VoIP Error Init Debug Gw Error Init Debug Gcc Error Init Debug Adept Error Init Debug teldrv Error Init Debug CallLog Error Init Debug Log Error Init Debug Channel Trace State enabled disabled ok kx kx ok ok k ox trace default The trace default command sets the default tracing of all trace keys and enables VoIP
132. celand or none This configuration option is only enabled when the Analog Interface Type is Central Office If the Caller ID type is DTMF then CPID parsing rules will need to be specified See Chapter 6 Media Gateway Parsers for further information on the creation and use of parsing rules Allowed Values Bellcore FSK e DTMF None Default Value None INI File Parameter Name telAlgCoCidType Central Office Type I Caller ID Alert Type Description Specifies the kind of Type I caller ID alert that is used on the trunk s connected to the DMG1000 either pause in ring cycle ring burst polarity reversal or none This configuration option is only enabled when the Central Office Type I Caller ID Type is set to Bellcore FSK 1 If the pause in ring cycle alert type is used the Incoming Rings Before Answer parameter should be set to greater than 1 for the caller ID information to be contained in the outgoing voice over IP VoIP message 2 If an alert is used on the trunk that is not explicitly supported in the list for example OSI or a dual tone use the None setting for this parameter Allowed Values Pause in Ring Cycle Ring Burst Polarity Reversal None Default Value Pause in Ring Cycle INI File Parameter Name telAlgCoCidAlertType Central Office Type I FSK Caller ID Expiration Description Specifies the duration in milliseconds that FSK Type I Caller ID information stays valid This confi
133. cified frequency minus the frequency deviation to the specified frequency plus the frequency deviation For example if the frequency is specified as 400 Hz and the frequency deviation is specified as 50 Hz then the bandwidth is 350 Hz to 450 Hz The frequencies of tone definitions are considered to match if their bandwidths overlap For example if tone 1 has frequency 400 Hz with frequency deviation of 50 Hz and tone 2 has frequency 460 Hz with frequency deviation of 20 Hz then these frequencies would match The bandwidth of tone 1 is 350 through 450 Hz and the bandwidth of tone 2 is 440 through 480 Hz Some common learn tone issues and possible solutions are provided here An On Off tone is detected while validating a stutter dialtone A stutter dial tone is a dial tone that has a short period of 2 or 3 cycles of On Off cadence before the dialtone is on continuously In most cases the stutter dial tone will not be an issue as the dial tone will have distinct frequencies In those rare cases where the dial tone shares the same frequencies as On Off tones it may be possible that the dialtone will experience validation errors This may happen if the dial tone stutter period matches the on and off timing of a tone with the same frequencies Since there is no conflict between Continuous tones and On Off tones the conflict between On Off tones and the stutter part of the stutter dial tone will not be detected automatically Possible solution Adjus
134. claim any express or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities You agree that Dialogic its subsidiaries and its suppliers will not be liable for any claims or damages arising from the use of the Software in such applications LIMITED WARRANTY The only warranty Dialogic makes is that the medium on which the Software is recorded will be replaced without charge if Dialogic in good faith determines that it was defective in materials or workmanship and if returned to your supplier with a copy of your receipt within ninety 90 days from the date you received it Dialogic offers no warranty for your reproduction of the Software This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Software has resulted from accident misuse abuse or misapplication This limited warranty gives You specific legal rights You may have others which may vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction EXCLUSION OF OTHER WARRANTIES Except as defined above in LIMITED WARRANTY THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY NONINFRINGEMENT FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR AGAINST LATENT DEFECTS Dialogic does not warrant or assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of any information text graphics links or other items contained within the Software Right to Audit If this Software is licensed for use in a Company Your Company agrees to keep all usual and proper records and
135. comes 9011435559000 You should validate the Catch All rules for Inbound TDM and VoIP by using some Called Numbers that don t match the Country Code One or Other Country Code rules Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 185 Routing Table Example 4 Basic Call with MWI System Configuration Central Office T1 Li i PBX Requirements Gateway WAN Media Ji L ports Analog POTS or Digital Server 1 All inbound TDM requests must be routed to the media server IP address 10 1 1 1 2 All inbound VoIP calls must be routed out the TDM Only TDM ports 1 6 can be used for calls 3 All inbound VoIP MWIs Message Waiting Indications must be routed out the TDM Only TDM ports 7 and 8 can be used Steps for MWIs 1 Determine the required TDM Trunk Groups and the VoIP Host Groups e From requirement 1 we have a TDM trunk group of all TDM requests and a VoIP host group of 10 1 1 1 e From requirement 2 we have a TDM trunk group of TDM ports 1 to 6 e From requirement 3 we have a TDM trunk group of TDM ports 7 amp 8 2 Setup TDM Trunk Groups Name Selection Direction Selection Mode Port Channel Content all TDM requests i TDM ports 1 to 6 Ascending Cyclic 1 6 TDM ports 7 amp 8 Ascending Cyclic
136. conds Default Value 100 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name cpFilterDebounce Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Call Progress Filter Percent DMG1000 Only Description Specifies the percent ratio between tone power and total power for the Call Progress Tone Detector Call progress tone signals whose power is a smaller percentage of total power than this value will be ignored Allowed Values 25 to 87 Default Value 45 INI File Parameter Name cpFilterPercent Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Call Progress Filter Low Cutoff DMG1000 Only Description Specifies the low cut off frequency for the Call Progress Tone Detector Call progress signals below this frequency will be ignored Allowed Values 250 Hz to 1000 Hz Default Value 300 Hz Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 125 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Note 3 17 1 12 Note 3 17 1 13 Note 3 17 1 14 Note 3 17 1 15 126 INI File Parameter Name cpFilterLowCuttoff Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Call Progress Filter High Cutoff DMG1000 Only Description Specifies the high cut off frequency for the Call Progress Tone Detector Call progress signals above this frequency will be ignored Allowed Values 500 Hz to 2000 Hz Default Value 650 Hz INI File Parameter Name cpFilterHighCutoff Unit requires a resta
137. configuration directly Software upgrades Normally software upgrades will not affect the configuration When a major software upgrade is performed however existing configuration information may be erased and default settings restored In this scenario the current configuration information could be exported before the upgrade is performed and then imported back to the Media Gateway after the upgrade All of the previous configuration data will then be restored except for the new parameters which would be at their default settings 2 6 1 Exporting Configuration Information To export the current configuration information 1 Select the Import Export Web page from the Configuration menu 2 There are options to export all settings export subset of settings only tone definitions only routing table only CPID parsing rules or export routing table schema a Click the Export All Settings button in the Export Files box The File Download dialog box then appears You may click the Open button to view edit the configuration file in Notepad or click the Save button to download and save the file to a directory The default name for the file is config ini Clicking the Save button causes the Save As dialog box to appear b Click the Only Tone Definitions button in the Export Files box The File Download dialog box then appears You may click the Open button to view edit the configuration file in Notepad or click the Save button to download
138. copy modify or transfer the Software and documentation or any copy in whole or in part except as expressly provided for in this Agreement If You transfer possession of any copy of the Software or documentation to another party in any way other than as expressly permitted in this Agreement this license is automatically terminated The Software may include portions offered on terms in addition to those set forth herein as set out in a license accompanying those portions OWNERSHIP OF SOFTWARE AND COPYRIGHTS Title to all copies of the Software remains with Dialogic its subsidiaries or its suppliers The Software is copyrighted and protected by the laws of Canada the United States and other countries and by international treaty provisions You may not remove any copyright notices from the Software which you must treat like any other copyrighted material except as expressly permitted in this Agreement Dialogic may make changes to the Software and or to items referenced therein at any time and without notice but Dialogic is not obligated to support or update the Software Except as otherwise expressly provided Dialogic grants no express or implied right under Dialogic patents copyrights trademarks trade secrets or other intellectual property rights in connection with the Software You may transfer the Software only if the recipient agrees to be fully bound by these terms and provided that You retain no copies of the Software UPGRAD
139. cters Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 51 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 2 4 52 Note Note Note Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name snmpSysName Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed SNMP System Contact Description Specifies the SNMP System administration contact name Allowed Values Any string with length between 0 63 characters Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name snmpSysContact Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed SNMP System Location Description Specifies the SNMP System location Allowed Values Any string with length between 0 63 characters Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name snmpSysLocation Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Web Server Group The Web Server subgroup includes the following parameters e HTTP Server Enabled e HTTPs Server Enabled HTTP Server Enabled Description Defines whether the HTTP Server is enabled or disabled Disable the HTTP Server to disable non secure Web access Allowed Values e Yes HTTP Server is enabled e No HTTP Server is disabled Default Value Yes Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 2 5 3 3 Note Note Note Parameter Reference INI File Parameter Name webHttpEnabled Unit requires a rest
140. ction 4 2 Learning and Validating Call Progress Tones on page 142 Figure 9 Manual Tones Web Page Call Progress Tone Configuration ry Alarms TDM VolP Serial Protocol Call Log MIB I Statistics Configuration Import Export P Mgmt Protocols Routing Table VolP TDM Serial Ports Tone Detection Certificates DSP Settings Diagnostics Trace Logging Upgrade Restart Add Manual Tone Load Default Tone Table Suomi Canoa Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 141 Dialogic Corporation Call Progress Tones 4 2 4 2 1 142 You can also add and delete call progress tones from this Web page Use the following buttons on the Manual Tones Web page to manipulate call progress tones Apply Changes button Saves changes to the configuration once the parameters have been edited Add button Adds a row to the tone table allowing a new tone definition to be added Reset to Default Values button Deletes all existing tones and restores factory default tones Export Tones Definitions button Exports the current tone definitions to an INI file This INI file can then be imported into other Media Gateway which will update only the call progress tones of the gateway The tones will also be exported as part of the system configuration information For details on the call progress tone parameters see Sectio
141. ctivity Measurement Period DMG2000 Only Description Specifies the Measurement Period for the Voice Activity Detector The Voice Activity Detector will wait at least this long to determine whether the signal on the line is voice Allowed Values 20 to 200 Default Value 30 INI File Parameter Name vadMeasurementPeriod Voice Activity Signal to Noise Ratio DMG2000 Only Description Specifies the Signal to Noise Ration SNR for the Voice Activity Detector Tonal signals with an SNR greater than this value will be treated as tones and ignored by the Voice Activity Detector Allowed Values 10 to 20 Default Value 18 INI File Parameter Name vadMinSNR Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 17 1 8 Note 3 17 1 9 Note 3 17 1 10 Note 3 17 1 11 Parameter Reference Call Progress Filter Threshold Description Defines the lower threshold for the Call Progress Tone Detector Call progress signals below this value will be ignored Allowed Values 38 dB to 20 dB Default Value 30 dB INI File Parameter Name cpFilterThreshold Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Call Progress Filter Debounce Description Specifies the debounce time in milliseconds for the Call Progress Tone Detector This value defines the minimum time that a call progress signal must be present before the detector is triggered Allowed Values 100 to 32768 millise
142. ctor on the rear panel of the Media Gateway Communication is established by starting a Web browser at the workstation and entering the IP address of the Media Gateway The unit s Web interface is password protected and the password can be changed by the system administrator Figure 5 shows a typical Web interface page for a DMG1000 unit and Figure 6 shows a typical Web interface page for a DMG2000 unit Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Overview Figure 5 DMG1000 Web Interface Dialegic mum um NR RR IP Settings LAN1 puis 00 a0 e6 01 02 03 Alarms TDM Client IP Address 172 16 3 10 VolP 255 255 0 0 Serial Protocol Call Log 0 0 0 0 MIB II Statistics ImportExport IP Mgmt Protocols Routing Table VoIP TDM Serial Ports Tone Detection Certificates DSP Settin Trace Logging Tests Web Ul Password Upgrade Restart A titer 100 7 Figure 6 DMG2000 Web Interface Dialagic Status IP Settings LAN1 puto MAC larms TDM fi 72 16 3 48 VoIP 255 255 0 0 Serial Protocol Call Log fo 0 0 0 config as mE P IP Settings LAN2 Mgmt Protocols 00 30 e6 89 05 79 Routing Table vor 1022 TDM 255 255 255 0 Serial Ports Tone Detection Certificates Management Interface Trace Logging Tests IP Routing Rules Web UI Password Upgrade Restart Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 29 Dialogic Corpo
143. d Note This selection box is only present when the Outbound Destination is set to TDM Route Method Specifies the method used for routing requests Redirect Requests are redirected to the destination which means that the gateway does not bridge the two networks Valid only when routing from to the same network ex VoIP gt VoIP TDM gt TDM Bridged Requests are bridged through the gateway between the inbound and outbound network Note This selection box is only present when the Outbound Destination is set to TDM CPID Number Manipulation CPID Manipulation defines rules for how Calling Number Calling Name Called Number Called Name Redirect Number and Redirect Name appear in the destination call Typically the calling and called numbers from the incoming call are simply passed through to the outgoing call However there are cases where it is desirable to alter either or both of these numbers A CPID Manipulation rule is applied to all calls routed via the Routing Table Each of the rules applies a formula using the incoming CPID information as inputs to determine the outgoing call s CPID Table 9 shows the syntax used for CPID Manipulation Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 157 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Table 9 Syntax Used for CPID Manipulation Rule Syntax Description Example Example Result S Source calling number
144. d Number of the form YYYxxxxxxx must be changed to Y YYxxxxxxx e Calling amp Called Number of the form ZZxxxxxxxx must be changed to ZZxxxxxxxx Steps l Determine the required TDM Trunk Groups and the VoIP Host Groups e From requirement 1 we have a TDM trunk group of all TDM requests and a VoIP host group of 172 13 4 3 e From requirement 2 we have a TDM trunk group of any TDM channel 2 Setup TDM Trunk Groups Name Selection Direction Selection Mode Port Channel Content all TDM requests any TDM channel Ascending Cyclic m 3 Setup VoIP Host Groups Name Load Balanced Fault Tolerant Host Summary All to 172 13 4 3 false false 172 13 4 3 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 179 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table 4 Set up Inbound TDM Rules There is a rule for every CPID manipulation Inbound TDM Rule 1 CPID Manipulation CPID of the form YYYxxxxxxx must be changed to YY Yxxxxxxx and CPID of the form ZZxxxxxxxx must be changed to ZZxxxxxxxx both map to the same rule That is prefix the number with a plus sign Inbound TDM Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Trunk Group X Country Code One Any All TDM Requests Inbound TDM Request Matching CPID Matching Calling z Called
145. de Dialogic Corporation 3 7 4 3 Note 3 7 4 4 Note 3 7 4 5 3 7 4 6 Parameter Reference Selects Transmit Pulse Waveform Description Selects the method to be used for generating the Transmit Waveform Shape Allowed Values e 75 Ohm 75 ohm unbalanced impedance is used 20 Ohm 120 ohm balanced impedance is used Default Value 75 Ohm Impedance INI File Parameter Name el Tx Wave Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed ISDN Protocol Description If ISDN is selected as the Signaling Mode specifies the ISDN protocol to be used Allowed Values e QSIG QSIG ISDN protocol is used ETSI EuroISDN ETSI protocol is used Default Value QSIG INI File Parameter Name elIsdnProtocol Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed ISDN Protocol Variant Description Specifies the type of El ISDN protocol variant to be used Allowed Values None None Standard Alcatel Support Alcatel Extensions Ericsson Support Ericsson Extensions e Avaya IP Office Support Avaya IP Office Extensions Default Value None INI File Parameter Name elIsdnProtocolVariant Contiguous B Channel Description Specifies B Channel Selection Mode Used By Switch Only applicable to El ISDN protocols Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 91 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 7 4 7 3 7 4 8 Note 92 Allowed Values
146. determines the called number of the outgoing call Called Name The formula as specified in the section above that determines the called name of the outgoing call Redirect Number The formula as specified in the section above that determines the redirect number of the outgoing call Redirect Name The formula as specified in the section above that determines the redirect name of the outgoing call Select Primary Alternate Route One Primary and multiple Alternate routes may be defined for a given routing rule if the gateway is unable to route the request to the Primary The Alternate routes will then be attempted until the request is successfully routed or if there are no more Alternate routes to try The Primary and Alternate routes differ only in the Outbound Routes section All other parts of the rule CPID matching etc are identical between the primary and alternate routes Figure 18 is a screen shot of the Select Primary Alternate Route configuration Web page Figure 18 Select Primary Alternate Route Configuration Web Page 5 2 3 Outbound Routes Device Selection Outbound To Host E Bina MP O ESP EE CPID Manipulation IM Mme P Number Number Number cating name 5 ome Select Primary Alternate Route O Primary Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 4 Add Altemate Route Inbound VoIP Call Routing Rules The Inbound VoIP Call Routing table is the main table used to route calls originating from the VoIP
147. diagnostic test This is an optional field that is not required to perform the diagnostic test Messages Waiting Status Choose the status value of the message waiting notification update This field is only valid when the Message Waiting diagnostic test is selected 9 1 2 2 Test Status When a diagnostic test is executed the test results are shown in the VoIP Interface Test Status table on the Web page The test can be canceled at any time by pressing the Cancel Test button When the test is completed a hyperlink will be displayed to allow the user to return to the VoIP Interface Test configuration Web page Figure 35 VoIP Interface Test Status Web Page Test Complete Initiate Call to 101 172 16 3 11 Test Passed Normal When the test is completed the results will show if the diagnostic test was able to establish a VoIP connection with the specified Destination VoIP Address Test Passed Normal VoIP connection was successful Test Failed CallEndReason VoIP connection failed The CallEndReason description is the error response received either from the specified destination VoIP endpoint or the VoIP interface of the gateway Some of the most common error responses and causes are Device Not Available User at VoIP endpoint is not in service Transport Failed VoIP address is invalid or no response received User Not Found User not found at VoIP endpoint Ambiguous Request VoIP address req
148. dy a continuous type or OnOffQuick type with matching frequencies In this case the Gateway will not be able to reliably detect the tone with a double cadence Validating Call Progress Tones If the timing and frequency information is available and the desire is to only validate the information then use the Validate Only button The Media Gateway will dial a destination address where the call progress tone to be tested can be heard The unit will then call each destination address and determine if the specified call progress tone is detected Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 147 Dialogic Corporation Call Progress Tones 4 2 6 4 2 7 148 The validation process is useful when there was an error in learning new tones and some tone characteristics have been manually adjusted to remove conflicts The Validate Only button can be used to validate the changes Follow these steps to validate the timing and frequency characteristics of call progress tones 1 For each call progress tone that is to be validated determine how that tone can be generated by the system 2 Verify that the system will generate the call progress tone that is desired by dialing that destination address from an extension and listening to verify the tone 3 Navigate to the Learn Tone Web page see Figure 10 and enter the destination addresses for the tones to be learned 4 Click on the Validate Only button 5 Wait for the Valida
149. e first call will be routed to the first VoIP server the second call will be routed to the second VoIP server the third call will be routed to the third VoIP server The next call will be routed to the first VoIP Server and the process will start all over again IP to Switch calls are handled in the same way when multiple VoIP Servers are configured as when only a single VoIP server is configured e g in a round robin fashion If the user configures more than one VoIP Server to receive and or originate calls through the Media Gateway then the user has the option to support fault tolerance on the incoming Switch to IP calls Specifically if the VoIP server fails to respond to incoming Switch call or responds with an error the Media Gateway will route the call to the next VoIP Server in the user configurable list of VoIP Servers If both IP Load Balancing and Fault Tolerance are enabled then incoming IP to Switch calls will be routed to the configured VoIP Servers in a round robin fashion and if at any time a VoIP Server fails to respond or responds with any error the Media Gateway will route the call to the next available VoIP Server Un Routable Calls A call is un routable by the Media Gateway if the unit is unable to route the call to the other network This may occur if there is insufficient destination address information to determine a destination for the call or if there are not enough free resources on the Media Gateway to route t
150. e Yes Contiguous B Channel Selection logical mapping e No Skip B Channel 16 physical mapping Default Value No INI File Parameter Name el ContiguousBchan Multiple Diversion Processing Description Selects which served diverting user to process when a call is received with multiple stages of diversion User A gt User B1 fwd gt User B2 fwd gt User C Allowed Values e First First served user User B1 Second Second served user User B2 Default Value First INI File Parameter Name isdnMultipleDiversion Outbound TDM Calling Party Source Description The source of the calling party that will be provided to the TDM interface for outbound calls and MWI requests When a DMG2000 is connected to a Mitel PBX and is configured for El QSIG this parameter must be set to one of the following options in conjunction with the Static TDM Calling Party parameter e Outbound TDM Calling Party Source set to Static and Static TDM Calling Party set to a number e g 1234 Outbound TDM Calling Party Source set to VoIP and the VoIP endpoint must provide a calling party number in the VoIP call MWI call request e Outbound TDM Calling Party Source set to VoIP Preferred and Static TDM Calling Party set to a number e g 1234 Allowed Values None No calling party is sent VoIP Calling party is derived from the VoIP call mwi request e Static A statically configured calling party is used e VoIP
151. e button In the Save As dialog box choose the directory in which you wish to save the configuration file and if you wish rename the file Do not however change the file type from INI Importing Configuration Information To import a configuration file 1 Select the Import Export Web page from the Configuration menu 2 Enter an INI file name in the Import box or use the Browse button to select an INI file 3 Click the Import Settings button to import the configuration information to the Media Gateway Upgrading the Software Software upgrades for the Media Gateway products will be made available on the Dialogic support Web site as needed Contact technical support to obtain software upgrade files Upgrade files are uploaded to the Media Gateway using the Web interface When a major software upgrade is performed existing configuration information may be erased and the default values restored It is recommended that before upgrading the software you should export the current configuration information using the Export utility Refer to Section 2 6 Importing and Exporting Configuration Information on page 36 for information about backing up the configuration information When an upgrade file is made available follow these steps to upgrade the Media Gateway 1 Start your Web browser 2 Download the software upgrade file from the Dialogic Support Web site 3 In the Web browser address box enter the IP address of the M
152. e corresponding tone event is to be learned or validated Tone Event field Indicates one of four types dialtone busy error or ringback Destination Address field Specifies the phone number or extension that when dialed will generate the call progress tone associated with the tone event If left blank the tone will be learned or validated by going off hook Destination addresses cannot be duplicated in the same session Note It is recommended that you dial each of the destination addresses from a separate phone to validate that the expected call progress tones to be learned or validated are produced The following shows possible ways in which call progress tones can be produced Dialtone For a system dialtone leaving the destination address blank will allow the unit to determine the dialtone by simply going off hook For a secondary dialtone enter the access code for the secondary dialtone in the destination address Busy Call an extension or number of a phone that is in use Caution Make sure that the extension is not forwarded on busy and that a busy tone is generated when the extension is dialed Error Call an invalid extension Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 143 Dialogic Corporation Call Progress Tones 4 2 2 4 2 3 144 e Ringback Call a valid extension not in use Caution Make sure that this extension is not forwarded on no answer and that it will ring until answ
153. e following defines how the trunk group contents are specified 1 A digit specified outside of parenthesis is interpreted as a port 2 A digit within parenthesis is interpreted as a channel 3 Both ports and channels are 1 based 4 Ranges are allowed and specified using a dash for ports and channels but does not allow combining a channel range with a port range i e If specifying a port range channel ranges are not allowed 5 A comma is used to indicate another range channel or port for any given trunk group 6 An entry of just the character represents all ports and channels 7 Whitespace is ignored Examples All channels in all ports 1 4 All channels in ports 1 through 4 1 3 All channels in ports 1 and 3 1 1 16 2 16 30 4 Channels 1 through 16 on port 1 and channels 16 through 30 on port 2 and all channels on port 4 3 2 4 16 Channel 2 and channels 4 through 16 on port 3 5 2 5 VolP Host Groups The configuration of VoIP Host Groups are used for routing requests to the VoIP network VoIP Host Groups are used to specify outbound routes to the VoIP network Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 167 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Figure 25 is a screen shot of the VoIP Host Groups configuration Web page Figure 25 VoIP Host Groups Configuration Web Page 5 2 5 1 Router Configuration O Inbound TDM Rules Inbound VoIP Rules OTDM Trunk Groups 9 VoIP Ho
154. e have a TDM trunk group of any TDM channel There is no corresponding All VoIP Requests host group since VoIP host groups are not used for inbound VoIP matching 2 Setup TDM Trunk Groups Name Selection Direction Selection Mode Port Channel Content all TDM requests 1 2 2 3 any TDM channel Ascending 4 Cyclic 4 i Notes 1 The name of the group is your choice but it must be unique within the trunk group set 2 Selection Direction and Selection Mode are only used for outbound TDM requests Since this is an inbound group they are don t care An asterisk specifies all ports and channels 4 If there are problems Cyclic and Ascending are fairly easy to debug So use them unless there are overriding site requirements 3 Setup VoIP Host Groups Name Load Balanced Fault Tolerant Host Summary All to 172 13 4 3 false 1 false 1 172 13 4 3 Notes 1 Load Balanced and Fault Tolerant are advanced concepts and are presented in subsequent examples For now set to false Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 171 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table 4 Setup Inbound TDM Rules Inbound TDM Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Trunk Group X All Inbound TDM Any All TDM Req
155. e only included to provide examples for the user The user configurable rules collectively known as the configuration data contain expressions that represent the various types of integration strings available on the telephony switch interface The configuration data contains rules and expressions that specify the location of the source destination reason and origin information in the integration or display string Configuration Options The user can access the parsing configuration data in several different ways Media Gateway configuration file ini which allows the user to use the import export Web page to upload new configuration data or to download existing configuration data for review Text file must have an adt file extension containing only the configuration data The cpid htm hidden Web page e For type I and II analog parsing rules only the analog page on the Web interface Figure 29 shows the default analog parsing configuration used for either type I or II CPID on the analog Web page Figure 30 shows this same data as it appears in the ini file Figure 31 shows a sample downloadable text based adt file Figure 32 shows the generic CPID configuration page available to all emulating units with the example showing the default Mitel digital display parsing rules Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 197 Dialogic Corporation Media Gateway Parsers Figure 29 Default Analog CPID Configuration
156. e timestamp of each alarm is the time since unit start in hours minutes seconds PIMG gt alarms 000 00 000 System MIB II Trap Cold start 0 000 00 000 System MIB II Trap Cold start 0 000 12 000 Telephony snw 1 In Service 000 12 000 Telephony snw 1 In Service 000 12 000 Telephony snw 2 In Service 000 13 000 Telephony snw 4 In Service 000 13 000 Telephony snw 5 In Service 000 13 000 Telephony snw 6 In Service 000 13 000 Telephony snw 7 In Service 000 13 000 Telephony snw 8 In Service 000 15 000 Telephony snw 3 In Service Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Index A Advanced Call Routing Subgroup 64 alarm information 216 alarms command 256 Analog parameters CPID Group 98 Feature Codes Group 95 Message Waiting Control Group 97 Timing Group 94 Audio Subgroup 66 basic configuration via the serial port 34 C call class rules 202 reason tokens 204 regular expressions 202 rule order 204 rule syntax 203 call log status information 216 call progress tones characteristics 142 editing 141 editing INI file directly 120 learn tone issues 146 Learn Tone Progress web page 144 Learn Tone Results web page 145 learn tone solutions 146 Learn Tone web page 142 learning 142 learning conflicting tones 146 learning existing tones 146 learning tone errors 145 learning unique tones 146 Manual Tones web page 141 parameter descriptions 114
157. ecimal notation Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name telSerAddrSrvr Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Serial CPID Expiration Description Specifies the time in milliseconds that serial CPID information received by a Media Gateway Master or Slave remains valid If the timeout expires before an inbound call is received on the Media Gateway PBX port indicated by the serial CPID information the serial CPID information is discarded Allowed Values 100 to 60000 milliseconds Default Value 2000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telSerCpidExpMs Tone Detection Parameters The Tone Detection parameters define the characteristics frequencies durations and deviations of the tones that the Media Gateway detects during call progress analysis These call progress tones can be viewed and edited manually from the Web interface if the characteristics are known or the Media Gateway can be directed to analyze and learn the characteristics of specific call progress tones For more information on viewing editing learning and validating call progress tones from the Web interface see Chapter 4 Call Progress Tones The Tone Detection parameters include the following ID Tone Event Tone Name Cadence Type Number of Cadence Cycles Tone Frequency Tone Frequency Deviation Tone Cadence Time Tone Cadence Time Deviation Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series
158. ed Values 30 through 2000 milliseconds Default Value 100 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telDialDigitOnMs Dial Inter Digit Time Description Specifies the delay in milliseconds between dialed DTMF digits to the PBX Allowed Values 30 through 2000 milliseconds Default Value 100 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telDialInterDigitMs Dial Pause Time Description Specifies the delay in milliseconds for each pause character encountered in a dial string Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Allowed Values 40 through 10000 milliseconds Default Value 2000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telDialPauseMs Turn MWI On FAC Phone Emulating Only Description Specifies the Features Access Code FAC to dial to turn on the Message Waiting Indicator MWI of a PBX extension Allowed Values Any string of less than 11 characters Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name telMwiOnFAC Turn MWI Off FAC Phone Emulating Only Description Specifies the Features Access Code FAC to dial to turn off the Message Waiting Indicator MWI of a PBX extension Allowed Values Any string of less than 11 characters Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name tel MwiOffFAC Outbound Call Connect Timeout Phone Emulating Only Description Specifies the time in milliseconds that the Media Gateway will wait for a
159. ed Values for Network Specific Facilities NSF in T1 ISDN Protocol Group ISDN Signaling Mode Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new TDM Call Type Group section to support call type per call feature 64 0346 02 September 2008 Updated to support Version 6 0 SU1 Software Chapter 3 Parameter Reference updated parameter description for Signaling Digit Relay Mode in Audio Group Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in T1 CAS Protocol Group T1 CAS Signaling Mode for Transfer Feature Code Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in Feature Code Group for Transfer Feature Code 14 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Revision History Document No Publication Date Description of Revisions 64 0346 01 March 2008 Updated to support Version 6 0 Software Global Updates Added and revised screen shots for the enhanced Web interface Added new DMG2060DTISQ and DMG2120DTISQ models which include support for survivability Removed some parameters that are obsoleted in Version 6 0 Software Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in Server Group for DNS Server Address 2 Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameters in Monitoring Group for Monitor VoIP Hosts and VoIP Host Monitor Interval Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in T1 E1 Mode Group for Telephony Port Inter
160. ed in a d below and You agree to prevent unauthorized copying of the Software a You may install and use one copy of the Software on a single user computer file server or on a workstation of a local area network and only in conjunction with a legally acquired Product b The primary Authorized User on the computer on which the Software is installed may make a second copy for his her exclusive use on either a home or portable computer c You may copy the Software into any machine readable or printed form for backup purposes in support of your use of one copy of the Software and d You may make one copy of Dialogic s documentation pertaining to the Software provided that all copyright notices contained within the documentation are retained You may not modify the Software and or merge it into another program You may transfer the Software its documentation and its license to another eligible party within Your Company if the other party agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement If You transfer the Software and documentation You must at the same time either transfer all copies whether in printed or machine readable form to the same party or destroy any copies not transferred this includes all modifications and portions of the Software contained in or merged into other Software You may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble rent lease or sublicense the Software You may not use
161. edia Server 3 1 All inbound TDM calls must be routed to one of the three Media Servers using Load Balancing Media Server 1 is 172 16 3 1 Media Server 2 is 172 16 3 2 and Media Server 3 is 172 16 3 3 2 All inbound VoIP calls must be routed out the TDM Any available TDM channel can be used Steps 1 Determine the required TDM Trunk Groups and the VoIP Host Groups e From requirement 1 we have a TDM trunk group of all TDM requests and a VoIP host group with three hosts 172 16 3 1 172 16 3 2 and 172 16 3 3 e From requirement 2 we have a TDM trunk group of any TDM channel 2 Setup TDM Trunk Groups Name Selection Direction Selection Mode Port Channel Content all TDM requests il any TDM channel Descending 1 Linear 1 m Notes 1 No reason for Linear Descending just wanted to show something different 3 Setup VoIP Host Groups Name Load Balanced Fault Tolerant Host Summary Load Balanced true false 172 16 3 1 172 16 3 2 172 16 3 3 176 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 4 Set up Inbound TDM Rules Routing Table Inbound TDM Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Trunk Group X All Inbound TDM An
162. edia Gateway that you wish to upgrade Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 4 Media Gateway Configuration When the System Login Web page appears enter the user name and current password in the boxes provided and click on the Log On button Note The user name and password are case sensitive 5 10 11 Once the login has been accepted the Media Gateway Summary Web page will appear Select the Upgrade Web page from the Configuration menu on the left side of the page Enter the path and filename of the upgrade file or click on the Browse button to select the upgrade file Click on the Install button to upload the file The Media Gateway will respond when the upgrade has completed approximately 10 20 seconds If there is more than one upgrade file repeat steps 5 through 7 for each additional file Select Restart from the Configuration menu on the left side of the page On the Restart Web page click on the Restart Unit Now or Restart Unit When Idle button See Section 2 5 Restart Options on page 36 The unit will now restart and re initialize using the new software Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 39 Dialogic Corporation Media Gateway Configuration 40 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference This section lists each Dialogic 1000 Media Gateway
163. eference added new parameter in T1 ISDN Protocol Group ISDN Signaling Mode for Multiple Diversion Processing Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in E1 ISDN Protocol Group ISDN Signaling Mode for Multiple Diversion Processing Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameters in Non Menu Hidden Parameters for SIP Phone Context From SIP Phone Context To and SIP User Phone Enabled Chapter 8 Unit Status removed details from MIB II Status Information section and replaced with link to SNMP Application Note Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 13 Dialogic Corporation Revision History Document No Publication Date Description of Revisions 64 0346 03 January 2009 Updated to support Version 6 0 SU2 Software Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in User Agent Group for Reliable Provisional Responses Chapter 3 Parameter Reference updated parameter to Default Value Off for Signaling Digit Relay Mode in Audio Group Chapter 3 Parameter Reference updated parameter to remove the statement Early Media is supported for VoIP to TDM calls only since it is now supported in both directions for RFC 3960 Early Media Support in Audio Group Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in TDM General Parameters for Connect Outbound Call On DTMF Chapter 3 Parameter Reference updated parameter to include more supported Allow
164. er Redirect Name Test Results Results Test Passed Reason Inbound Rule Country Code One Outbound Group All TDM Requests Outbound Route VoIP Device Bridged Method 172 13 4 3 Host 0 IP Port 5553000 Calling Number Calling Name 9145552345 Called Number Called Name Redirect Number Redirect Name Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Routing Table For Inbound VoIP CPID of the form 1 YY Yxxxxxxx is changed to 91 Y YYxxxxxxx Input Output Inbound Route o Inbound TDM e Inbound VoIP Request Type Call Host 172 16 5 4 IP Port Calling Number 100 Calling Name William Called Number 17165551000 Called Name Jane Redirect Number 165 Redirect Name Mike Test Results Results Test Passed Reason Inbound Rule Country Code One Outbound Group Any TDM Channel Outbound Route VoIP Device Bridged Method 1 see note 1 Port 1 see note 1 Channel 100 Calling Number William Calling Name 917165551000 Called Number Jane Called Name 165 Redirect Number Mike Redirect Name For Inbound VoIP CPID of the form 1ZZxxxxxxx is changed to 9011 YY Yxxxxxxx Input Change Called Number to 1435559000 Output Inbound Rule becomes Other Country Codes Called Number be
165. er Rolm 9751 SW9006 Rolm 9751 with software release 9006 or earlier Default Value None INI File Parameter Name telPbxType If Optiset 300E is selected as the Telephony Switch Type the setting of subscriber Message Waiting Indicator MWT lights is not supported and the Analog version of the DMG1000 Models DMG1008LSW DMG1004LSW should be used to set clear subscriber MWIs on this switch type Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed TDM Port Enable Parameters The TDM Port Enable parameters allow you to individually configure the call control capabilities of each port connected to the Media Gateway These parameters also allow you to enable or disable individual ports The TDM Port Enable group includes the following parameters e Port Telephony Port Enabled Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 10 0 1 Note 3 10 0 2 Note 3 11 3 11 1 Parameter Reference Port Description This is a read only parameter that defines the Media Gateway port numbers If the T1 E1 signaling mode is configured for ISDN the Port refers to the T1 or El span number Telephony Port Enabled Description Specifies whether the telephony port is disabled or enabled Disabled ports drop communications links to the PBX If the T1 E1 signaling mode is configured for ISDN the Port refers to the T1 or El span number Allowed Values Yes Port is enabled a
166. er Maximum Delay DMG2000 Only Description Specifies the maximum jitter buffer delay A larger delay provides protection against larger network jitter but increases audio delay It is recommended that this value be set to at least four times the duration of one RTP packet interval If the minimum maximum and initial jitter buffer delays are set to the same value the jitter buffer will operate in the non adaptive mode Allowed Values 0 to 200 milliseconds Default Value 200 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name dspJbDelayMaxMs 3 17 1 17 Jitter Buffer Initial Delay DMG2000 Only Description Specifies the starting jitter buffer delay It is recommended that this value be set to at least two times the duration of one RTP packet interval If the minimum maximum and initial jitter buffer delays are set to the same value the jitter buffer will operate in the non adaptive mode Allowed Values 0 to 200 milliseconds Default Value 20 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name dspJbDelayInitMs 3 17 1 18 Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period DMG2000 Only Description Controls the speed at which the jitter buffer adapts downward when network conditions allow The larger the value the slower the jitter buffer adapts downward when jitter decreases Allowed Values 1000 to 65535 milliseconds Default Value 10000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name dspJbAdaptationPeriodMs 3 17 1 19 Jitter Buffer Deletion Threshold DMG2000 Only Description When the
167. ered Learn button Specifies that the Media Gateway will automatically learn the tone Used when the frequency and timing information of a call progress tone are unknown For more information on using the Learn feature see Section 4 2 2 Learning the Characteristics of Unknown Call Progress Tones on page 144 Validate Only button Specifies that the Media Gateway will validate a call progress tone whose frequency and timing information are known For more information on using the Validate only feature see Section 4 2 5 Validating Call Progress Tones on page 147 Learning the Characteristics of Unknown Call Progress Tones If the frequency and timing information of a call progress tone is unknown use the Learn button to have the Media Gateway automatically learn the tone This is accomplished by selecting the tone entering a destination address where the desired call progress tone can be heard and selecting Learn The unit will then call each destination address and analyze the tones on the line The result will be a tone definition for the specified tone event that can be added to the tone table Follow these steps to learn the timing and frequency characteristics of unknown call progress tones 1 For each call progress tone that is to be learned determine how the tone can be generated by the system 2 Verify that the system will generate the desired call progress tone by dialing that destination address from an extension
168. ervice and configured properly Verify gateway is configured for specific PBX interface is there a default ini file Run the test again with a minimum number of extensions configured and in Sequential test mode Run the test again with the Trace Capture diagnostic utility started to log the detailed call flow of the TDM self verification diagnostic test Use the TDM Interface diagnostic utility to test Initiate Call and Send Message Waiting Status on a particular interface and channel Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 233 Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics Check the Call Log for the call end reason of the connections used in the diagnostic tests Some of the most common test result failures and causes are Test Failure Reasons Originate an outbound PBX call The extension numbers for the PBX interface are not correct The PBX interface and channel are not configured properly Dial tone is not detected or being provided Answer an outbound PBX call The extension numbers for the PBX interface are not correct The PBX interface and channel are not configured properly Receive outbound call progress alerting Call progress is not detected or being provided Receive call party identification CPID The switch is not providing CPID The programmed CPID type on the Media Gateway does not match the CPID type being provided by the switch ex Type or Type Il
169. es User s Guide 7 Dialogic Corporation Contents LS TES Examples icc ce hed vae ADI ados a erro oa ed gd 209 7 4 Secure Voice Data 1 eh 210 7 4 1 Configuration s aai e a a o a hr 210 7 4 2 Secure Voice Data Examples 0 nuaa 211 7 5 Installing Certificate Using Internet Explorer liliis 212 8 Unit Status ou iier one Cu Ru deett ede qti e eode Rog AA Saa 215 81 Summary Information 0 0 006 hn 215 8 2 Alarm Information vw a oy a Rede et ed ovale a alae 216 8 3 Call Log Status Information 0 0 0000 eee 216 8 4 Telephony Status Information liliis ren 217 8 5 MIB II Status Information 0 0 0 0 0000s 217 8 6 Version Information 0 0000 E a A a A eee 218 8 7 Diagnostics Information ooococooooooo nn 218 9 DIAQNOSTICS IE 219 9 1 VoIP Interface Test vida nO ER teo eme eer d eue eden e E ARIS 219 9 1 1 VoIP Interface Test Overview 0 219 9 1 2 VoIP Interface Test Operation llis eene 220 92 TDM Interface Test im bee PIA eR iad ee d DEP RO Eid vets AUR e 222 9 2 4 TDM Interface Test Overview 0 0 00 nes 222 9 2 2 TDM Interface Test Operation 0 000 cee 223 9 3 TDM Self Verification Test 0 rr 226 9 3 1 TDM Self Verification Test Overview 0 llle 226 9 3 2 TDM Self Verification Test Operation 0 00 eee 227 9 4 Diagnostic LOGGING ws eoe os ed BPRS RU M USE Ree Se OR
170. es can be added existing rules can be modified and existing rules can be deleted Changes will not be permanent until the Submit button is clicked Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Routing Table 5 2 1 Determining the Call Destination The Routing Table uses four tables configured by the user to determine the final destination The Inbound TDM Call Routing Rules table provides a set of rules used to determine the route of incoming TDM calls The Inbound VoIP Call Routing Rules table provides a set of rules used to determine the route of incoming VoIP calls The TDM Trunk Groups table is used to divide the TDM ports and channels into groups that can be used for matching inbound TDM calls or routing outbound TDM calls The VoIP Host Groups table is used to divide the VoIP endpoint IP Addresses into groups that can be used for routing outbound VoIP calls Note The VoIP Host Groups are not used for Inbound VoIP Call matching As a call enters the gateway the incoming characteristics of the call are matched against the Routing Table rules in the appropriate Routing Table from top down If a match is found the CPID information is updated based on the CPID manipulation entry in the table assigned to the matched rule The call is then sent to the destination assigned in the table Figure 13 below shows call routing flow for Routing Table Figure 13 Routing Table
171. es of data HTTP The data transmitted between the Media Gateway and a Web browser To secure HTTP the Media Gateway uses the Secure HTTP HTTPS protocol Call Control The data used to setup and tear down a call To secure Call Control the Media Gateway uses Transport Layer Security TLS on top of SIP Voice The actual conversation once a call is connected To secure voice the Media Gateway uses Secure RTP SRTP The HTTPS and TLS protocols require digital identity certificates e g public key certificates Therefore certificate management is also covered in this section Secure HTTP HTTP data is transmitted as messages between the Media Gateway and a Web browser These messages travel on the network as clear text and can be listened to by anyone Even though the HTTP interface has access security via a password privacy is not secure As an example if a message containing a request to change a password were captured by a hacker or third party the hacker or third party could log on to the Media Gateway and change the configuration HTTPS safeguards HTTP data by encryption and authentication With HTTPS messages are no longer transmitted as clear text and are not readily readable HTTPS requires two actions by the user Both the Media Gateway and the PC on which the Web browser used to connect to the Media Gateway via HTTPS is running must be configured with the proper certificate Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media
172. escription The host and domain name of the Media Gateway This name is used when the unit registers with the SIP Registration Server Allowed Values Domain Name string Default Value pbxgw default com INI File Parameter Name sipServerDomain Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Transport Type Description Defines the preferred transport protocol of call signaling packets Allowed Values e TCP Transmission Control Protocol is used as the transport protocol e UDP User Datagram Protocol is used as the transport protocol Default Value UDP INI File Parameter Name sipTransportType Call as Domain Name Description Defines the host name used in the From header of generated INVITE requests Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 3 1 4 3 3 1 5 3 3 1 6 Parameter Reference Allowed Values Yes The Media Gateway s domain name is used as the Host Name e No The Media Gateway s IP address is used as the Host Name Default Value No INI File Parameter Name sipCallAsDomainName SIPS URI Scheme Enabled Description Defines whether the SIPS URI Uniform Resource Identifier or SIP URI scheme will be used for generating SIP messages Allowed Values Yes All Request To From and Contact URIs generated by the gateway will use the SIPS URI scheme No All Request To From and Contact URIs generated by the gateway will use the
173. eter is used by the PBX in the event there is more than one application server e g voice mail unified messaging server etc connected to the PBX This parameter is only required when the serial protocol parameter is set to a value of MD110 and this Media Gateway is configured as the Serial Protocol Master Allowed Values 0 to 99 Default Value 1 INI File Parameter Name telSerSysNum MWI Response Timeout Description Specifies the time in milliseconds the Media Gateway serial protocol Master will wait for a failed response from the PBX before sending a success message to a serial protocol Slave in response to a message waiting indicator MWI request from the slave This parameter is only required when this Media Gateway is configured as the Serial Protocol Master Allowed Values 100 to 60000 milliseconds Default Value 2000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telSerMwiRspToutMs IP Address of Serial Server Description Specifies the IP Address of the Media Gateway that is configured as the Serial Protocol Master Serial Protocol slave devices send and receive all serial protocol information Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 113 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Note 3 14 11 3 15 114 to from the Master device via the IP network This parameter is only required when the Media Gateway is configured as the Serial Protocol Slave Allowed Values Any valid IP address in dotted d
174. f alarm entry Severity Severity Level of alarm entry Description Text Description of alarm entry Port Port Number of alarm entry Text Message Text message of alarm entry Clicking on the Clear Alarms button will clear all alarm information 8 3 Call Log Status Information Selecting Call Log from the Status menu displays information from the Call Log table including ID Call Record ID number Start Time Displays the starting time of the call This is the time at which the inbound call rang at the Media Gateway End Time Displays the end time of the call Source A call originates either from the PBX network or the IP network This field specifies whether the call originated from the PBX network From Switch Network or from the IP network From Packet Network End Reason Displays the reason for ending the call Inbound Info Displays the call party information of the inbound call If the call is From Switch Network this field contains the call party information of the inbound PBX call In this case the format of this field is lt PBX port number gt lt calling party number gt lt calling party name gt gt lt called party number gt lt called party name gt If the call is From VoIP Network this field contains the call party information of the inbound IP call In this case the format of this field is lt calling party number gt lt calling party name gt lt calling party IP gt gt lt called party
175. face Side Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in T1 CAS Protocol Group T1 CAS Signaling Mode for Enable Glare Detection Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameters in T1 ISDN Protocol Group ISDN Signaling Mode for ISDN Answer Supervision Enable Network Specific Facilities NSF and Enable Failover Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameters in E1 ISDN Protocol Group ISDN Signaling Mode for ISDN Answer Supervision Enable and Enable Failover Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in TDM General Parameters for Disconnect on Fax Cleardown Tone Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in T 38 Fax Advanced Settings for Fax Modem Carrier Detect Threshold DMG1000 Only Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new section and parameters in Tone Generation Configuration Parameters Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new section and parameters in Positive Answer Machine Detection Chapter 5 Routing Table updated with new functionality and configurations previously referred to as the Dial Plan Chapter 5 Routing Table added new section for Call Routing Examples Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 15 Dialogic Corporation Revision History 16 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation About This Publication The following topics provide information about this guide
176. fies the type of telephony request to which the rule applies Any All telephony request types Call Calls only Message Message waiting notifications only Trunk Group Specifies the name of the TDM Trunk Group on which the request must arrive at the gateway in order to match the rule 5 2 2 2 Inbound TDM Request Matching Defines the call party information expressions that are used to match an inbound telephony request from the TDM network to this routing rule The Inbound TDM Request Matching is performed when the inbound TDM request matches the Request Type and Trunk Group of one of the defined rules CPID Number Matching Part of the criteria for matching the characteristics of an incoming call to a rule in one of the Routing Table is number matching The incoming Calling Number Calling Name Called Number Called Name Redirect Number and Redirect Name is tested against a match rule defined in the Routing Table If the match fails this routing rule table entry will fail Table 8 shows the syntax used for CPID Matching Table 8 Syntax Used for CPID Matching Token Description Matches any number string when entered alone 0123456789 Identifies a specific digit digit string digit string Specifies a range of digit strings Identifies any digit string that is included in the range The range delimiters must both contain the same number of digits A digit string must be no more than 9 d
177. figurable features The values of these configuration parameters can usually be left as default SNTP Server IP Address A server that the Media Gateway gets current time from to compare to the expiration date of a certificate This is how the Media Gateway identifies an expired certificate when necessary The expired certificates are identified by certificate date verification This time providing server is needed if a TLS certificate date is verified TLS Transport Enabled This parameter enables use of the TLS protocol and must be set to Yes TLS Server Port This is the IP port post number to listen to for TLS connection requests Any number between 1024 and 65000 is valid The default is 5061 If you wish to use a port number other than the default specify the number The Media Gateway will then communicate this number to peers via URI Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Data Security TLS Cipher List The Cipher list is not a configurable parameter The Media Gateway supports 6 ciphers in a list but cannot be changed Valid OpenSSL ciphers can be found at http www openssl org docs apps ciphers html A default cipher list must be specified for TLS to work The Media Gateway uses the default ALL ADH LOW EXP MD5 STRENGTH SSL TLS Protocol This parameter specifies the SSL record type to be used with the TLS connections and can be set to use SSLv3 and or TLSv1 Mutual Au
178. figure the routing rules for requests that are inbound from the VoIP network Select Click anywhere in this column to select an entry When a rule is highlighted the associated configuration is shown in the tables below The selected row may be moved up or down in the table by dragging and dropping it into a different position in the list or deleted The selected row may also be moved up or down by clicking on Move Row Up or Move Row Down buttons Itis a common error to modify the configuration of the incorrect rule Make sure that the correct rule is selected before modifying the configuration Enable Check this box to enable the rule If this box is not checked this rule is not checked for incoming calls Rule Label Label for this entry This label is used only to help identify the rule to the administrator It is not used by any other tables in the Routing Table configuration Request Type Specifies the type of telephony request to which the rule applies Any All telephony request types Call Calls only Message Message waiting notifications only Originating VoIP Host Address Specifies the VoIP hosts from which requests are accepted for use by the rule The originating VoIP host s address must match this expression in order for the telephony request to match the rule Table 10 shows the syntax for VoIP Host Address Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 5 2
179. following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSS
180. g a CA signed certificate The Media Gateway generates a certificate signature request CSR to a PC The CSR is used by the CA to create a signed certificate The root certificate of the CA that signed the CSR is uploaded to the Media Gateway along with the CA signed certificate The root certificate of the CA that signed the CSR as well as the signed certificate are also configured into the VoIP devices that will communicate with the Media Gateway via TLS The choice of either self signed or CA signed certificates depends on the system administration and the desired level of trust within the system Self signed certificates are generated by the Media Gateway and therefore do not cost any money and may take less time to install A self signed certificate is simply downloaded from the gateway and installed on VoIP devices that will communicate with the Media Gateway via TLS However when self signed certificates are used the VoIP device must have a unique certificate installed for each Media Gateway with which it will communicate This process could become lengthy if the VoIP device needs to communicate with a number of Media Gateway units On the other hand CA signed certificates require time and effort since the certificates must be signed by a CA However once you have the signed certificate the CA root certificate can be used to communicate with multiple Media Gateway units TLS Feature Configuration TLS has the following con
181. gateway between voice over IP VoIP devices SIP on a LAN and the PBX By emulating station sets to the proprietary PBX the Media Gateway provides full call party information to the IP network The DMG2000 or the analog version DMG1008LSW DMG1004LSW of the DMG1000 can also connect directly to the PSTN as shown in Figure 2 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Overview Figure 1 Typical IP Gateway Phone Emulating Topology PBX Connection VoIP Terminal Device Digital Telephone l l Digital PBX Media Gateway All Phone Emulating Models 1 8 l Digital Digital Phone gt 1 Teleph elepnone Lines VoIP Eo Terminal T1 E1 Trunks Device LAN Figure 2 Typical IP Gateway Phone Emulating Topology PSTN Connection VoIP Terminal DMG1008LSW DMG1000 Media Gateway or DMG2000 Media Gateway 1 8 Analog Phone Lines or 1 4 T1 E1 Trunks Terminal Device Note The T1 E1 Models must only be connected to the PSTN through an NTU CSU or other LAN device that provides line isolation 13 1 Serial Protocol Support in Phone Emulating Mode By emulating telephone sets to the switch the Media Gateway provides call party information over the IP network However the amount of call party information that the Media Gateway can provide is limited to the amount of data that the switch provides its sta
182. ge 0 0c cece eee eee 168 26 Host List Configuration Web Page o0ooccocccocccoco eee 168 27 Inbound VOIP Route and Outbound Route 0 00 cee 169 28 Inbound TDM Route and Outbound Route o ooccocccccc ee 170 29 Default Analog CPID Configuration Data on Analog Web Page 0 00005 198 30 Default Analog CPID Configuration in the ini File llle 199 31 Sample Analog Type Il CPID Configuration Data in the adt File 200 32 Default Mitel Digital CPID Configuration Data cpid htm 02 00 cee eee 201 33 Storing Self Signed Certificate by Certificate Import Wizard o oooo ooooomooo 213 34 VolP Interface Web Page 0 cee tE kan KAKA I nnn 220 35 VolP Interface Test Status Web Page ocoocccccccco 221 36 VolP Interface Call Log Web Page oocccccccccccn eee 222 37 TDM Interface Web Page ooocccocccco eR I ru 223 38 TDM Interface Test Status Web Page ooocoocccccoccnc 224 39 TDM Interface Call Log Web Page 0 00 ett eee 225 40 TDM Self Verification Web Page 0 0 cect tenes 228 41 Call Flow for Initiate Call Answer Call lille 230 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 9 Dialogic Corporation Contents 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Call Flow for Initiate Call Answer Call and Transfer Call llle 231 Call Flow for Send Message Waiting
183. gement Protocols Parameters on page 47 Routing Table Selecting Routing Table brings up the Routing Table Web page which allows you to configure a set of rules used to define the characteristics of a call routed through the gateway For detailed information about the Routing Table see Section 5 2 Router Configuration on page 152 VoIP Selecting VoIP brings up the VoIP Web page which allows you to configure VoIP parameters For detailed information about the VoIP parameters see Section 3 3 VoIP General Parameters on page 53 TDM Selecting TDM brings up the TDM Web page which allows you to configure TDM parameters Some of these parameters differ depending on the different DMG1000 and DMG2000 models For detailed information about the TDM parameters see Section 3 6 TDM General Parameters on page 75 Serial Ports Selecting Serial Ports brings up the Serial Ports Web page This Web page allows you to configure the serial protocol for the Media Gateway serial port See Section 3 13 Serial Ports Parameters on page 107 for detailed information about the Serial Ports parameters Tone Detection Selecting Tones allows you to manipulate call progress tone parameters These parameters define the characteristics frequencies durations and deviations of the tones that the Media Gateway detects during call progress analysis For more information see Section 3 15 Tone Detection Parameters on page 114 and Chapte
184. gic Corporation Media Gateway Parsers Figure 30 Default Analog CPID Configuration in the ini File Version Information MAC 00 a0 e6 06 05 07 IP 10 0 1 41 DSP Firmware 9 1w Fax FRI MAY 02 17 59 51 2003 DSP Firmware ROM 9 1 w Fax FRI MAY 02 17 59 51 2003 Main Board Boot ROM 4 2 WED APR 02 17 51 55 2003 Gateway Application ROM lab FRI JUL 02 14 18 13 2004 Main Board CPLD Platform 3 Ver 1 Adept Config Default pXEKEk kckok kck ckckckok hok RARE RRA RARE RARA RARA RARA RARA ck ck ck EERE ERE RE RARA RARA RA EEE Client IP Address IP Adress in dotted decimal notation ipClientAddr 10 0 1 41 Call Progress Cadence Time Deviation ms Number between 0 1000 cpToneTimeDeviation Tone Definition1 Timel 0 cpToneTimeDeviation Tone Definitionl Time2 0 cpToneTimeDeviation Tone Definitionl Time3 0 cpToneTimeDeviation Tone Definition16 Timel 0 cpToneTimeDeviation Tone Definition16 Time2 0 cpToneTimeDeviation Tone Definition16 Time3 0 CPID RULES 95551212 direct external call rule 9 d 2 10 src_number 1 reason direct 8 disconnect string rule 8 reason disconnect 3211 forwarded internal call to 3211 rule d 2 6 dst_number 1 reason no answer Reason Code no answer busy etc Call Origin internal external The configuration data consists of call class parsing rules Call class parsing rules are PER
185. guration information 38 IP Media Gateway changing the password 35 configuration procedure 35 parsers 197 product description 21 setting the IP address 33 upgrading the software 38 Web interface 28 IP parameters 41 LANI Group 42 LAN2 Group 43 IP Web page 30 33 L LANI Group parameters 42 LAN2 Group parameters 43 Learn Tone Progress web page 144 Learn Tone Results web page 145 Learn Tone web page 142 M Manual Tones web page 141 Message Waiting Control Group parameters 97 MIB II status information 217 N network capture 239 Non Menu Hidden parameters DSP Advanced Group 122 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 259 O online Help 31 operating modes phone emulating 22 overview diagnostic logging 235 P parameter categories Call Progress Tone 114 IP 41 Non Menu Hidden parameters 135 Serial Protocol 110 Session Initiation Protocol SIP 53 TI E1 79 TDM Analog 94 TDM Digital Parameters 101 TDM General Parameters 75 TDM Port Enable Parameters 102 260 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation parameters Analog Interface Type 99 Anti replay Window Size Hint 72 Audio Compression 66 Authentication Tag Length 72 Authentication Type 72 Auto Answer Inbound TDM Calls 101 Backup Proxy Server Address 62 Backup Proxy Server Port 62 BOOTP Enabled 43 Cadence Type 116 Call as Domain Name 54 55 Call Monitor In
186. guration option is only enabled when the Central Office Caller ID Type is Bellcore FSK Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 8 4 8 3 8 4 9 3 9 Note Parameter Reference Allowed Values 100 to 60000 milliseconds Default Value 10000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telAlgTypeICidExpMs Central Office Type I FSK Caller ID Timeout Description Specifies the duration in milliseconds that the digital signal processor DSP will perform FSK Type I Caller ID detection after an alert is detected This configuration option is only enabled when the Central Office Caller ID Type is Bellcore FSK and the Caller ID Alert Type is other than None Allowed Values 500 to 30000 milliseconds Default Value 5000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telAlgFskCidTimeoutMs Auto Answer Inbound TDM Calls Type Il CPID Description Type II CPID requires that the inbound TDM call be answered by the gateway before the switch will send the inband CPID to the gateway If this parameter is enabled then the gateway will answer the call and gather the inband CPID from the switch prior to sending a call request to the VoIP endpoint This allows the gateway to send the CPID information as part of the initial call request to the VoIP endpoint If this parameter is disabled then the gateway will not answer the inbound TDM call until after the call request is sent to the VoIP endpoint and the VoIP endp
187. h operation Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 7 2 16 3 7 2 17 Note 3 7 2 18 3 7 2 19 Parameter Reference INI File Parameter Name telFacCDropError MWI Confirmation Tone Description Specifies whether or not the PBX sends a confirmation tone to signal the successful completion of a Message Waiting Indication MWI request Allowed Values e Yes PBX will send a confirmation tone e No PBX will not send a confirmation tone Default Value No INI File Parameter Name telMwiConfirm Use Same Port for MWI Clear Set Description Specifies if the PBX requires that the telephony station that set an MWI be used to clear the MWI Some PBX types require that the port that set an MWI be the same port that clears the MWI Allowed Values Yes Use the same port to set and clear the MWI e No Not necessary to use the same port to clear an MWI that was used to set the MWI Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name telMwiSamePort Initial Wait for Inband CPID Description Specifies the number of milliseconds the DMG2000 will wait for the first inband DTMF digit to arrive after answering an incoming PBX call Allowed Values 100 to 10000 milliseconds Default Value 2000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telInbCpidStartMs Inband CPID Complete Timeout Description Specifies the number of milliseconds the DMG2000 will wait for each subsequent in
188. hannels is dependent on the TDM configuration T1 or El and the number of hardware spans Table 16 shows the mapping from a protocol and span to the TDM Capture channel numbers Span 1 Span 2 Span 3 Span 4 T1 CAS 1 to 24 25 to 48 49 to 72 73 to 96 T1 QSIG 1 to 23 24 to 46 47 to 69 70 to 92 T1 NI 2 1 to 23 24 to 46 47 to 69 70 to 92 E1 QSIG 1 to 30 31 to 60 61 to 90 91 to 120 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation To use the TDM Capture enter the Channel Number to capture select either RX or RX amp TX then click Start Capturing Logging begins and the display changes to show the state of the log An example of a running log is shown in Figure 55 241 Diagnostics Figure 55 Example of Running Log TDM Capture Trace Logging trace Coni Stat 200 IT Doris Ces Eee While the TDM Capture is running the fill level of the log is displayed The log is a circular buffer so when it reaches capacity new data overwrites the old Once the log reaches capacity the fill level does not change The log can be transferred to a PC clicking on Download Doing this brings up a File Download dialog box as shown in Figure 56 Select Save to save the file to the PC After saving you can play the file using Windows Media Player or view it with a variety of audio file viewers ex CoolEdit Pro Adobe Audition Figure 56 File Download
189. haracters Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name telHuntGroupExtn Disconnect on Fax Cleardown Tone Description Specifies whether the gateway will disconnect the call when fax cleardown tone is received Allowed Values Yes The call will be disconnected when the fax is complete No The call will not be disconnected when the fax is complete Default Value No INI File Parameter Name telDisconnectOnFaxCleardown Connect Outbound Call On DTMF Description Specifies whether the gateway will connect the outbound call when it is in the Alerting or Proceeding state and a DTMF event is detected Allowed Values Yes An outbound call is in the Alerting or Proceeding state and a DTMF event is detected the call will transition to the Connected state No An outbound call is in the Alerting or Proceeding state and a DTMF event is detected the event will be discarded and the call state will remain unchanged Default Value No INI File Parameter Name telConnectOnDTMFEnable Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 7 3 7 1 3 7 1 1 3 7 1 2 Note Parameter Reference TDM T1 E1 Parameters The T1 E1 parameters are used to configure the T1 and El port s on DMG2000 only and include the following groups e T1 El Mode Group T1 CAS Protocol Group T1 CAS Signaling Mode e T1 ISDN Protocol Group ISDN Signaling Mode El ISDN Protocol
190. he call The Media Gateway provides a number of different ways to handle these conditions in order to insure that no calls are dropped or not completed Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Overview 1 2 1 1 IP to Switch Calls There are a few circumstances where an inbound IP call may not be routed to the Switch network They are the following No available Switch Ports There are no available Media Gateway Switch ports on which to carry the call Invalid or No Switch destination address specified The IP call information does not contain a valid E 164 destination address for the Switch network The administrator may specify a default destination IP address that is to receive any inbound IP calls that cannot be routed to the Switch If the administrator specifies a default destination IP address for un routable IP calls then any inbound IP call that cannot be routed to the Switch network is handled in the Routing Table as alternate routes 1 2 1 2 Switch to IP Calls There are a few circumstances in which an inbound Switch call may not be routed to the IP network They are the following P destination not configured IP destination not present The administrator may specify a default destination Switch extension that is to receive any inbound Switch calls that cannot be routed to the IP network If the administrator specifies a default destination Switch extension for un
191. he test will select the first interface available This option is only available on TDM interfaces that have more than one bearer channel Destination Number The required number of the TDM endpoint that the diagnostic test will use when attempting to establish a connection If this configuration is empty the diagnostic test will not be performed Source Name The alphanumeric name representing the source party that is delivered to the destination endpoint during the diagnostic test This is an optional field that is not required to perform the diagnostic test Source Number The number representing the source party that is delivered to the destination endpoint during the diagnostic test This is an optional field that is not required to perform the diagnostic test Messages Waiting Status Choose the status value of the message waiting notification update This field is only valid when the Message Waiting diagnostic test is selected 9 2 2 2 Test Status When a diagnostic test is executed the test results are shown in the TDM Interface Test Status table on the Web page The test can be canceled at any time by pressing the Cancel Test button When the test is completed a hyperlink will be displayed to allow the user to return to the TDM Interface Test configuration Web page Figure 38 TDM Interface Test Status Web Page Test Complete Initiate Call to 628 Test Passed Normal 224 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Serie
192. he Feature Code to dial in order initiate a transfer Allowed Values A string from 0 to 10 digits in length using any of the following characters 0 9 og Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 95 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Note 3 8 2 2 Note 3 8 2 3 Note 3 8 2 4 96 Note Default Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Gateway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flash operation INI File Parameter Name telFacTransfer Consult Call Dialtone Drop Code Description Defines the Feature Code to dial in order to drop a Consult call that is in the Dialtone state and to reconnect to the original call Allowed Values A string from 0 to 10 digits in length using any of the following characters 0 9 dh Default Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Gateway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flash operation INI File Parameter Name telFacCDropDt Consult Call Proceeding Drop Code Description Defines the Feature Code to dial in order to drop a Consult call that is in the Proceeding state dialed but not connected and to reconnect to the original call Allowed Values A string from 0 to 10 digits in length using any of the following characters 0 9 dh Default Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Ga
193. he risk Important points to remember about Network Capture are Downloading does not require any special software but viewing requires Ethereal On the Network Capture Web page checking a protocol type causes it NOT to be captured 240 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 9 4 4 Diagnostics After selecting protocol filters be sure to click Apply Filters e Size of the log is determined at startup DMG1000 1 1 Mbytes DMG2000 24 Mbytes Downloading the Network Capture clears the log and starts another Stopping the log and restarting it does not clear the log new data is just appended TDM Capture The TDM Capture creates an in memory log of voice traffic on the DMG2000 s T1 or El line The capture is controlled from the DMG2000 s Web interface as shown in Figure 54 You can log voice traffic from a single channel in either the Rx direction or the Rx and Tx direction where Rx is defined as entering the DMG2000 and Tx as leaving the DMG2000 The TDM Capture is not supported by the DMG1000 Figure 54 TDM Capture Control Web Page 9 4 4 1 Table 16 Mapping of Protocol and Span Numbers to TDM Capture Channel Numbers TDM Capture Configuration Ss f e O O Receive Only Receive and Transmit TDM Capture Details Figure 54 shows the default values i e immediately after power up for the TDM Capture You can select any one channel for logging The range of c
194. his Publication Related Information For additional information related to the Dialogic 1000 Media Gateway DMG1000 and Dialogic 2000 Media Gateway DMG2000 products see the following Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series Getting Started Guide for information about installing cabling and initializing the product prior to performing configuration and operation tasks Dialogic Media Gateway Installation and Configuration Integration Notes for details on typical installation and configuration of Media Gateway when used to interface between PBX and unified messaging application http www dialogic com manuals for Dialogic product documentation http www dialogic com support for Dialogic technical support http www dialogic com for Dialogic product information Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 19 Dialogic Corporation About This Publication 20 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Overview 1 1 1 The following information provides an overview of the Dialogic Media Gateway Product DES O neues d vac eR ACER Rr UU RR EADS eee aE a REP wed 21 Call Routing in Phone Emulatmg Mode 2 5 6 030284 er meme m Sow OER 26 Vols over IP Address Translatione rererere oA eis betes anders eee eeeisede 27 e 23 E AET E E EE AAA E 28 ps A TE STIET ETTE OETI EET PA 28 A O ee eee ee eer ee eS ee re re ee 31 Product Description The Med
195. ia Gateway is a telephony gateway appliance that connects to phone lines through its telephony interface and connects to a LAN via a 10 BaseT or 100 BaseT Ethernet connector NOTE Throughout this document the term Media Gateway addresses information that applies to both the Dialogic 1000 Media Gateway DMG1000 and Dialogic 2000 Media Gateway DMG2000 products The term DMG1000 applies only to information relating to the DMG1000 product and the term DMG2000 applies only to information relating to the DMG2000 product The Media Gateway provides an inexpensive bridge between a legacy PBX or public switched telephone network PSTN and a managed packet network This device converts signals from circuit switched equipment into Session Initiation Protocol SIP standard protocol for transmission over a local area network LAN or wide area network WAN to communications devices such as IP phones wireless phones and IP servers in almost any location The DMG1000 is available in the following models DMG1008LSW DMG1004LSW Supports phone emulation mode for analog interfaces DMG1008DNIW Supports phone emulation mode for a number of digital PBXs including Avaya Nortel NEC and Siemens DMG1008MTLDNIW Supports phone emulation mode for Mitel digital PBXs DMG1008RLMDNIW Supports phone emulation mode for Rolm 8000 and 9751 switches Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 21 Overvie
196. ia Gateway second Ethernet port This Ethernet port may be used as the Maintenance port depending on the IP Management Interface setting A value of 0 0 0 0 disables the LAN2 Ethernet port The LAN2 subnet must not overlap with the LANI subnet other wise there will be IP routing issues Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 43 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Note 3 1 2 2 Note 3 1 3 3 1 3 1 44 Allowed Values Any valid IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value 0 0 0 0 disabled INI File Parameter Name ipClientAddrLan2 Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Client Subnet Mask Description Sets the subnet mask of the Media Gateway maintenance Ethernet port Allowed Values Any valid IP mask Default Value 255 255 255 0 INI File Parameter Name ipSubnetMaskLan2 Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed IP Advanced Parameters DMG2000 The IP advanced parameters allow an advanced network topology to be configured using the LAN interfaces The administrator can configure which LAN interfaces provide access to the IP management protocols The administrator can also configure custom routing rules that replace or supplement the functionality of the default network gateway address Management Interface The management IP protocols are accessible on all LAN interfaces by default These management IP protocols include HTTP
197. ible through the Web interface Allowed Values 1024 to 65000 Default Value 49000 INI File Parameter Name gwRTPStartPort Unauthenticated SRTP Enable Description This parameter can be used to force Realtime Transport Protocol RTP packets to be received without authentication even if an authentication algorithm has been negotiated between parties This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not accessible through the Web interface Allowed Values e Yes RTP VOICE packets will NOT be authenticated e No RTP VOICE packets will be authenticated per the negotiated algorithm Default Value No INI File Parameter Name srtpUnAuthenticatedSRTP Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 139 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 18 12 Note 3 18 13 140 Note UnEncrypted SRTCP Enable Description This parameter can be used to force SRTCP packets to be transmitted in an unencrypted fashion even if cipher keys have been negotiated between parties This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not accessible through the Web interface Allowed Values e Yes Transmitted RTCP CONTROL packets will NOT be encrypted despite the negotiation of cipher keys e No Transmitted RTCP CONTROL packets will be encrypted per the negotiated cipher keys Default Value No INI File Parameter Name srtpUnEncryptedSRTCP UnEncrypted SRTP Enable De
198. ic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 1 1 4 Note Note 3 1 1 5 Note 3 1 2 Note 3 1 2 1 Note Parameter Reference BOOTP Enabled Description When enabled this parameter causes the Media Gateway to issue a BOOTP request on startup A BOOTP TFTP server may be configured to provide IP credentials firmware upgrades and a configuration INI file Either a BOOTP TFTP server or DHCP server may be used to respond to the Media Gateway BOOTP request Allowed Values Yes Parameter enabled Media Gateway issues a BOOTP request on startup e No Parameter disabled Media Gateway does not issue a BOOTP request on startup Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name ipBootpEnabled Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed SNTP Server IP Address Description Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP server IP address Used for SIP Transport Layer Security TLS data verification Allowed Values Any valid IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value No default value INI File Parameter Name ipSntpServerAddr Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed IP Settings LAN2 DMG2000 The IP Settings LAN2 group includes the following parameters e Client IP Address e Client Subnet Mask Currently LAN2 is only supported in Version 5 1 SUI Software or later Client IP Address Description Sets the IP address of the Med
199. igits in length digit string digit string digit string Specifies a range of digit strings as a comma separated list The range delimiters and comma separated number strings must all contain the same number of digits x Matches any single digit Matches any number of ending digits Specifies a compound expression Figure 15 is a screen shot of the CPID Matching configuration Web page Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 155 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Figure 15 5 2 2 3 156 CPID Matching Configuration Web Page Inbound TDM Request Matching CPID Matching Called Redirect Number Number Called Redirect Name Name Calling Number Calling Name Calling Number The formula as specified in the section above that is used to match the calling number of the incoming call Calling Name The formula as specified in the section above that is used to match the calling name of the incoming call Called Number The formula as specified in the section above that is used to match the called number of the incoming call Called Name The formula as specified in the section above that is used to match the called name of the incoming call Redirect Number The formula as specified in the section above that is used to match the redirect number of the incoming call Redirect Name The formula as specified in the section above that is used to match the redirect name of the
200. ilSafeTimeout Non Menu Hidden Parameters The following parameters do not appear in the Web interface and can only be changed by editing the configuration file directly These parameters are listed alphabetically Incompatible Message STATUS Inform On No PBX CPID Phone Emulating Only Inform On No PBX CPID Time Phone Emulating Only ISDN Overlap Receive Minimum Digits ISDN Overlap Receive Timeout ISDN Service Class e SIP Phone Context From Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 135 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 18 1 Note 3 18 2 Note 136 e SIP Phone Context To e SIP User Phone Enabled e Start Port for RTP Unauthenticated SRTP Enable UnEncrypted SRTCP Enable UnEncrypted SRTP Enable Incompatible Message STATUS Description If Yes then a STATUS message with cause 98 will be sent if an incompatible message for the current call state is received If No then a STATUS message will not be sent Applicable only when ISDN Protocol is QSIG or ETSI This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not accessible through the Web interface Allowed Values Yes No Default Value No INI File Parameter Name isdnIncompatibleMsgStatus Inform On No PBX CPID Phone Emulating Only Description When this parameter is enabled Yes the Media Gateway will generate an informational VoIP message to the IP peer if no CPI
201. imeout Phone Emulating Only Wait for Ringback Connect on Blind Transfer Phone Emulating Only Hunt Group Extension Phone Emulating Only Disconnect on Fax Cleardown Tone Connect Outbound Call On DTMF PCM Coding Description Sets the Media Gateway to the PCM coding mode used by the PBX Allowed Values uLaw PBX uses uLaw coding aLaw PBX uses ALaw coding Default Value uLaw INI File Parameter Name dspPcmCoding Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 75 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 76 Minimum Call Party Delay Phone Emulating Only Description Specifies the minimum number of milliseconds that the Media Gateway will wait for display information calling party information on an inbound PBX call before the call is routed to the IP destination 0 for no delay Allowed Values 0 through 10000 milliseconds Default Value 0 INI File Parameter Name telMinWaitForCpid Maximum Call Party Delay Phone Emulating Only Description Specifies the maximum number of milliseconds that the Media Gateway will wait for display information calling party information on an inbound PBX call before the call is routed to the IP destination 0 for no delay Allowed Values 0 through 10000 milliseconds Default Value 2000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telCallInfoTout Dial Digit On Time Description Specifies the duration in milliseconds of a dialed DTMF digit to the PBX Allow
202. in dotted decimal format Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name syslogServerAddr Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Alarms to SysLog Enabled Description Defines whether alarms are sent to the SysLog server Allowed Values Yes Alarms are sent as user level facility messages No Alarms are sent to SysLog server Default Value No INI File Parameter Name syslogAlarmEnabled Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 49 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 2 3 50 SysLog Minimum Alarm Severity Description Defines the minimum alarm severity level that generates notifications to SysLog server Allowed Values e Error Error alarms are sent to the SysLog server e Warn Error and Warning alarms are sent to the SysLog server Info Error Warning and Informational alarms are sent to the SysLog server Default Value Info INI File Parameter Name syslogAlarmSeverity Diagnostics Trace to SysLog Enabled Description Defines whether diagnostic trace messages are sent to SysLog server Allowed Values Yes Diagnostics trace messages are sent as user level facility debug messages e No Diagnostics trace messages are not sent as user level facility debug messages Default Value No INI File Parameter Name syslogTraceEnabled SNMP Group The SNMP subgroup includes the following parameters NMP Traps Enabled S SNMP Mi
203. in the From header of SIP messages sent from the gateway INI File Parameter Name sipPhoneContextFrom SIP Phone Context To Description Defines the string that will be used in the phone context attribute include in To header of SIP messages sent from the gateway This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not accessible through the Web interface Allowed Values String with length between 0 254 characters Default Value Blank If the sipPhoneContextTo string is blank the phone context attribute will not be included in the To header of SIP messages sent from the gateway INI File Parameter Name sipPhoneContextTo Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 18 9 Note 3 18 10 Note 3 18 11 Note Parameter Reference SIP User Phone Enabled Description Determines if the user phone attribute is include in INVITE messages sent from the gateway This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not accessible through the Web interface Allowed Values e Yes No Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name sipUserPhoneEnabled Start Port for RTP Description Specifies the first UDP IP port used for Realtime Transport Protocol RTP traffic RTP port number assignments increment from this starting value This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not access
204. incoming call Outbound Routes Defines how the request is to be routed by the gateway if the TDM inbound request matches the Request Type Trunk Group and CPID matching of a given rule in the Inbound TDM Rules table This defines the network to which the request is to be routed as well as the CPID Manipulation expressions that are to be used to manipulate CPID prior to routing the request Device Selection Specifies the destination network of the route and how the request is to be routed Figure 16 is a screen shot of the Device Selection configuration Web page Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Figure 16 Device Selection Configuration Web Page Outbound Routes Device Selection Outbound Host Destination Group HostGroup 1 CPID Manipulation Called D Redirect R Number Number Called D Redirect R Name Name O Primary Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 4 Add Altemate Route Outbound Destination Specifies the network to which the request is to be routed VoIP Route to the VoIP network TDM Route to the TDM network Blocked Request is not routed The inbound request will be immediately rejected Host Group Name of VoIP Host Group to which the request is to be routed Note This selection box is only present when the Outbound Destination is set to VoIP Trunk Group Specifies the name of TDM Trunk Group to which the request is to be route
205. interfaces to be selected for inclusion exclusion The test will be executed on all available PBX interfaces 4 Select the Test Mode to be Sequential or Simultaneous this is an optional parameter for the test Note The Send Message Waiting Status diagnostic tests are always executed in Sequential mode due to possible load issues of the PBX under test To start the specified diagnostic test press the Start Test button on the Web page Note Executing the TDM interface diagnostic tool temporarily disables gateway functionality Any active connections will be released Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 227 Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics Figure 40 TDM Self Verification Web Page TDM Self Verification Test Configuration Initiate Call Answer Call Test Selection O Transfer Call Test Mode Sequential O Simultaneous Channel Extension Numbers m o m m N H Note This test temporarily disables gateway functionality Any active connections will be released 228 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics 9 3 2 1 Configuration Options The following configuration items are available to be modified by the user Interface Extension Numbers Enter the extension number of the interfaces to include in the selected diagnostic test Interface extension numbers are only valid for Initiate Call Answer Ca
206. ipulation Calling S Called D Redirect R Number Number Number Calling Called Redirect Name E Name D Name E Select Primary Alternate Route e Primary o Alt 1 o Alt 2 o Alt 3 o Alt 4 Notes 1 Recall that the rules are matched top down So this rule is only matched when the previous rule fails Therefore this rule catches all calls except those to 2xxx Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 195 Routing Table 4 Set up Inbound VoIP Rules Inbound VoIP Rule 1 All inbound VoIP calls must be routed out the TDM span connected to the PBX requirement 1 Inbound VoIP Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Originating VoIP Host Address X Inbound VoIP Calls Call Inbound VoIP Request Matching CPID Matching Calling n Called Redirect Number Number Number Calling m Called m Redirect r Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection Outbound Trunk Destination TOM Group Span ERS CPID Manipulation Calling S Called D Redirect R Number Number Number Calling Called Redirect Name Name p Name Select Primary Alternate Route e Primary o Al 1 o Alt2 o Alt 3 o Alt 4 196 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation
207. is section includes Connecting to Terminal Interface Via DIAGNOSTICS Connector Connecting to Terminal Interface Via LAN Connector Connecting to Terminal Interface Via DIAGNOSTICS Connector Perform the following 1 Connect a serial cable to the serial interface connector on the rear panel of the Media Gateway For connector pin designation information refer to the DIAGNOSTICS Connector Pin Designations table DMG1000 or COM1 and COM2 Connector Pin Designations table DMG2000 in the Getting Started Guide 2 Using a standard serial interface application for example Procomm Plus or HyperTerminal set the workstation to the following Baud Rate 38400 for DMG1000 115200 for DMG2000 Parity None e Data Bits 8 e Stop Bits 1 Hardware Flow Control Off 3 Press the Enter key repeatedly until the following prompt appears PIMG gt 4 At the prompt type pwd and press Enter 5 When prompted enter the password for the admin user the default is IpodAdmin and press Enter The Media Gateway will respond with Admin level accepted and then display the prompt You may now issue terminal commands to the Media Gateway Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 243 Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics 9 5 2 Connecting to Terminal Interface Via LAN Connector Perform the following to initiate a Telnet session at the workstation connected to the Media Gateway via the LAN interface 1 From the co
208. iting Status MW Extension Send MW Set MW STATUS MW STATUS 9 3 2 3 Test Status When a diagnostic test is executed the test results are shown in the TDM Self Verification Test Status table on the Web page Test Result Symbol Description Test skipped because not configured or not available no capability not enabled or not in service n Test was pending but did not execute because a failure occurred P Test Passed Test Failed The test can be canceled at any time by pressing the Cancel Test button When the test is completed a hyperlink will be displayed to allow the user to return to the TDM Self Verification Test configuration Web page Figure 44 TDM Self Verification Test Status Web Page Outbound Route Answer 1 2000 gt 2 2001 gt 4 2003 2 2001 gt 4 2003 gt 1 2000 5 2004 gt 6 2005 gt 8 2007 6 2005 gt 8 2007 gt 5 2004 3 idle 4 Initiate 4 2003 gt 1 2000 gt 2 2001 S Answer 6 s 8 2007 gt 5 2004 gt 6 2005 232 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics 9 3 2 4 Test Results After the diagnostic test s are completed or canceled the test results can be opened or saved to a text file txt for documented proof of the verification process To open the test results in another Web browser window click the pbxtest txt hyperlink Figure 45 TDM Self Verification Test Results Tes
209. ive Answer Time Maximum Silence after Voice has been Detected Maximum Time to Wait for Voice Maximum Live Answer Time Description Sets the time limit at which point a continuous voice answer will be considered an answer machine Allowed Values 1000 to 20000 milliseconds Default Value 2600 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name pamdMaxAnswerSize Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 17 3 2 3 17 3 3 3 17 3 4 3 18 Parameter Reference Minimum Live Answer Time Description Specifies voice answers have to be at least this long in length to be consider voiced and not noise Allowed Values 10 to 1000 milliseconds Default Value 120 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name pamdMinAnswerSize Maximum Silence after Voice has been Detected Description Specifies any silence that last this long after voice has been detected will be considered an end of voice If this length of silence is encountered before the maximum live answer time expires the voice answer will be considered a live person Allowed Values 10 to 10000 milliseconds Default Value 500 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name pamdMaxSilence Maximum Time to Wait for Voice Description Sets the maximum amount of time to wait for voice detection before declaring call answered by unknown Allowed Values 1000 to 20000 milliseconds Default Value 4000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name pamdFa
210. jitter buffer grows past this value frames exceeding the threshold are deleted immediately Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 127 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 17 1 20 3 17 1 21 3 17 1 22 3 17 1 23 128 Allowed Values 0 to 500 milliseconds Default Value 500 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name dspJbDeletionThresholdMs Jitter Buffer Frame Deletion Mode DMG2000 Only Description Determines how frames are deleted when the jitter buffer adapts downward Allowed Values e Soft More emphasis on audio quality but maximum delay may be exceeded Hard Hard cap on the maximum delay which may negatively impact audio quality Default Value Soft INI File Parameter Name dspJbDeletionMode IP to PCM AGC Enable DMG2000 Only Description Enables automatic gain control AGC in the IP to PCM direction Allowed Values On AGC is enabled e Off AGC is disabled Default Value On INI File Parameter Name dspIpToPbxAgcEnable IP to PCM AGC Slew Rate DMG2000 Only Description Determines the speed at which the AGC adapts in the IP to PCM direction Allowed Values Fast More emphasis on AGC gain adjustments Medium Mid point e Slow More emphasis on Audio Quality Default Value Medium INI File Parameter Name dspIpToPbxAgcSlewRate IP to PCM AGC Target Level DMG2000 Only Description Defines the IP to PCM AGC target level for a ra
211. ken FWD is found in the reason code section of a display the reason code presented to the application will be fwd all This provides a means of normalizing different switch specific reason codes into strings that can be recognized by the application The following is an origin example trans origin default internal If the switch specific code is default then the application string of the translation is set as the default translation result if no switch specific string is found In the above case the default call origin for all displays is internal Call Class Rules On a telephone network there can be several different string formats for call information Integration or display strings which use the same format are said to be in the same Call Class That is two integration or display strings can be parsed using the same rules if they are in the same call class If an integration or display string cannot be parsed using the same rules then a new call class must be declared Regular Expressions Call classes will be recognized using user defined regular expressions The parser uses standard regular expression metacharacters special characters which are used to describe sequences of regular characters in addition to some specific metacharacters Table 14 Parser Regular Expressions Characters and Purse Analog Parsing Meta Characters P Applicable Any single characte
212. l Inbound VoIP Request Matching CPID Matching Calling n Called Redirect Number Number Number Calling m Called m Redirect r Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection Outbound Trunk Destination TOM Group FDM porte Lios CPID Manipulation Calling S Called D Redirect R Number Number Number Calling Called Redirect Name Name p Name Select Primary Alternate Route e Primary o Alt 1 o Alt 2 o Alt 3 o Alt 4 188 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Inbound VoIP Rule 2 For inbound VoIP MWI requests requirement 3 Inbound VoIP Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Originating VoIP Host Address X All VoIP Calls Call i X All VoIP MWIs Message Inbound VoIP Request Matching CPID Matching Calling Called a Redirect Number Number Number Calling A Called p Redirect Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection poor IM eins Destination IUM Group IDMort ns CPID Manipulation Calling S Called D Redirect Number Number Number Calling S Called D Redirect Name Name Name Select Primary Alternate Route e Primary o Al 1 o Alt2 o Alt 3 o Alt 4 6 Validate the Routing Table An exercise left to the reader Dialogic 10
213. l Typically the calling and called numbers from the incoming call are simply passed through to the outgoing call However there are cases where it is desirable to alter either or both of these numbers A CPID Manipulation rule is applied to all calls routed via the Routing Table Each of the rules applies a formula using the incoming CPID information as inputs to determine the outgoing call s CPID Table 12 shows the syntax used for CPID Manipulation Table 12 Syntax Used for CPID Manipulation Rule Syntax Description Source calling number Destination called number Dl Oo on Redirection number Inbound VoIP address gm Takes wha s in quotes as literal Concatenate Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 163 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Table 12 Syntax Used for CPID Manipulation Continued Rule Syntax Description lext str n Extract n characters from left of str rext str n Extract n characters from right of str Irem str n Remove n characters from left of str rrem str n Remove n characters from right of str mext str pos n Extract n characters from str starting pos digits from left repl str old new Find 1st occurrence of old in str and replace with new Figure 22 is a screen shot of the CPID Manipulation configuration Web page Figure 22 CPID Manipulation Configuration Web Page Routes Outbound
214. le to extract tone characteristics but when the Gateway dialed the destination address to validate the newly learned tone an unexpected call progress CP tone was detected The detected CP tone is listed in the error message This detected CP tone did not match the newly learned tone or any expected conflicts This detected CP tone may be a tone that already exists in the tone definition table or another newly learned tone Action Using the listed tone characteristics and the unexpected tone event that was detected it may be possible to compare tones and determine which of the tones was actually detected If the tone definitions only overlap in the time deviation then it may be possible to manually add the tone and adjust the time deviation of the new tone and the conflicting tone to give two unique tones If the two tones are the same then only one tone can be used Failed Validation Timeout The Gateway dialed the destination address and was able to extract tone characteristics but when the Gateway dialed the destination address to validate the newly learned tone no CP tone was detected Action Validate the destination address Existing Tones The tones listed in this section were successfully learned but found to match tones already in the configuration Since these tones are already in the tone definition table no further action is needed Unique Tones The tones listed in this section were successfully learned and validated withou
215. lephony request that are inbound from the TDM network Rules are evaluated from the top down until a matching rule is found Figure 14 is a screen shot of the Inbound TDM Rules configuration Web Page Figure 14 Inbound TDM Rules Configuration Web Page Note Router Configuration 9 Inbound TDM Rules Inbound VoIP Rules OTDM Trunk Groups VoIP Host Groups Inbound TDM Rules Select Enable _Ruletabel_ ___RequestType__ _TrunkGroup__ E rear Select to configure the routing rules for requests that are inbound from the TDM network Select Click anywhere in this column to select an entry When a rule is highlighted the associated configuration is shown in the tables below A selected row may be moved up or down in the table by dragging and dropping it into a different position in the list or deleted It is acommon error to modify the configuration of the incorrect rule Make sure that the correct rule is selected before modifying the configuration Enable Check this box to enable the rule If this box is not checked this rule is not checked for incoming calls Rule Label Label for this entry This label is used only to help identify the rule to the administrator It is not used by any other tables in the Routing Table configuration Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Request Type Speci
216. ll and Transfer Call diagnostic tests Interface extension numbers that are left blank will not be included in the diagnostic test Message Waiting Extension Number Enter the extension number to send the message waiting status update requests Message waiting extension number is only valid for the Send Message Waiting Status diagnostic test selection Test Selection Choose the type of diagnostic test to perform Available options are Initiate Call Answer Call Transfer Call and Send Message Waiting Status Test Mode Select the execution mode of the diagnostic test to be either Simultaneous or Sequential Sequential test mode executes only a single diagnostic test at one time The next diagnostic test will not start until the previous test has completed Simultaneous test mode executes as many diagnostic tests at once as possible The next diagnostic test will start as soon as the previous test has started The Send Message Waiting Status diagnostic tests are always executed in Sequential mode due to possible load issues of the PBX under test 9 3 2 2 Call Flows Initiate Call Answer Call The call flow of the Initiate Call Answer Call diagnostic test tries to verify the operation of originating an outbound call and answering an inbound call These tests also include verification of outbound call progress inbound CPID send receive DTMF and disconnect supervision Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 229 Dialogic Corporation
217. ll has been answered If No then a received CONNECT message will be used to determine when the call has been answered Notes 1 Progress Indicator 1 Call is not end to end ISDN or may be in band information 2 Progress Indicator 8 Inband treatment has been applied Allowed Values e Yes No Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name isdnAnswerSupervisionEnable 3 7 4 11 Enable Failover Description Specifies the Failover mode used when the gateway is powered down Note This parameter is only applicable for DMG2060DTISQ and DMG2120DTISQ models Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 93 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 8 3 8 1 3 8 1 1 3 8 1 2 94 Allowed Values Yes Failover enabled span 1 to span 2 and span 3 to span 4 e No Failover disabled spans not interconnected Default Value No INI File Parameter Name tle Failover TDM Analog Parameters The TDM Analog parameters only apply to the Models DMG1008LSW DMG1004LSW The Analog parameters include the following subgroups Timing Group Feature Code Group Message Waiting Control Group CPID Settings Group Timing Group The Analog parameters in the Timing group include Flash Hook Loop Current Off Debounce Incoming Rings Before Answer Ringing Timeout Flash Hook Description Specifies the duration in milliseconds that the DMG1000 will remain on hook during a hook fla
218. lowed Values Yes Validate certificate date e No Do not validate certificate date Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name sipTIsCertVerifyDate 3 3 4 7 Verify TLS Peer Certificate Trust Description Determines whether the TLS peer s certificate trust relationship is validated against the list of trusted CA certificates Allowed Values Yes Validate No Do not validate Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name sipTIsCertVerify Trust 3 3 4 8 Verify TLS Peer Certificate Purpose Description Determines if the purpose of the TLS Peer Certificate should be verified Allowed Values Yes Validate e No Do not validate Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name sipTIlsCertVerifyPurpose 3 3 5 Proxy Group The Proxy group includes the following parameters Primary Proxy Server Address Primary Proxy Server Port Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 61 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 3 5 1 3 3 5 2 3 3 5 3 3 3 5 4 62 Backup Proxy Server Address Backup Proxy Server Port Proxy Query Interval Primary Proxy Server Address Description The IP Address of the SIP Proxy Server through which the Media Gateway may send receive requests If blank the Media Gateway will not use a Proxy Server Allowed Values Any valid IP Address in dotted decimal notation Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name sipProxyServerAddr Primary Proxy Server Port
219. mand 250 trace show command 248 trace time command 250 trace type 247 266 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation trace utility 245 trace key 245 trace type 247 U un routable calls IP to PBX calls 27 PBX to IP calls 27 Upgrade Web page 31 39 upgrading the software 38 V Validate Tone Progress web page 148 Validate Tone Results web page 148 ver command 256 version information 218 W Web interface 28 Web page Gateway 30 Import Export 36 IP 30 33 Password 31 35 Restart 31 36 Serial Protocol 30 Summary 34 Upgrade 31 38 39 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 267 268 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation
220. may not be sufficient or desirable in many network topologies For example LANI and LAN2 may each require their own network gateway for access Figure 7 illustrates one such network topology Figure 7 Example of a Network Topology O dd oom LAN1 Subnet 4 LAN2 Subnet A IP Router 1 IP Router 2 i LAN1 Subnet B LAN2 Subnet B A D VoIP Device A 43 IP Management Terminal Two routes are required in this topology so that 1 LANI can access LANI Subnet B 2 LAN2 can access LAN2 Subnet B The IP Router 1 may be configured as the default network gateway However the DMG2000 must also be configured to use IP Router 2 as a network gateway A custom route must be created so that LAN can access LAN2 Subnet B In addition the default network gateway may be optionally Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 45 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 46 Note Note replaced by another custom route The custom route would allow LANI to access LANI Subnet B without using a default network gateway A default network gateway route blindly forwards IP packets whose destination is not the local subnet A custom route is specific It contains a single routing rule that specifically states when an IP packet is forwarded to a specific network gateway This means that multiple custom routes may be installed on the same gateway to access multiple subnets Each route contains a configured rule
221. mber of irrelevant messages It also increases the time before the log wraps thus making it more probable an error will be caught 9 4 3 1 Network Capture Details The DMG1000 unit has one network interface LANI an external network that connects the DMG1000 to a VOIP network The DMG2000 unit has three network interfaces DSP an internal network that connects the DMG2000 DSP to the DMG2000 CPU LANI an external network that connects the DMG2000 to a network VOIP LAN2 an external network that connects the DMG2000 to a network non VOIP Notes 1 The DMG1000 s LANI is equivalent to the DMG2000 s LANI 2 Currently LAN2 is only supported in Version 5 1 SUI Software or later The Network Capture is controlled from the Media Gateway s Web interface The DMG2000 Network Capture control page is shown in Figure 51 Even though the DMG1000 control page has only one network interface LANI the ideas presented in this section apply equally to the DMG2000 and the DMG1000 Figure 51 Network Capture Control Page DMG2000 Network Capture Configuration Figure 51 shows the default values i e immediately after power up for a DMG2000 The first level of filtering occurs on the interface level You can select Capture to enable or Do not capture Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 239 Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics to disable individual interfaces The second level of filtering is on the pr
222. media stream to G 711 Passthrough Default Value T 38 INI File Parameter Name gwFaxTransportMode Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed SRTP Group The Secure Real time Transport Protocol RTP group includes the following parameters SRTP Preference e MKI on Transmit Stream e Key Derivation Enable Key Derivation Rate e Anti replay Window Size Hint e Cipher Mode Authentication Type Authentication Tag Length SRTP Preference Description Specifies whether the Media Gateway and server exchange voice packets as encrypted or non encrypted Allowed Values RTP Only The Media Gateway uses only RTP If the server only supports Secure RTP then the calls are rejected SRTP Only The Media Gateway uses only Secure RTP If the server does not support Secure RTP then the calls are rejected Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference SRTP_Preferred The Media Gateway attempts to connect using Secure RTP If the server supports Secure RTP the call is connected using Secure RTP If the server does not support Secure RTP then the call is connected using RTP Note SRTP Preferred is not supported in Version 5 1 SU2 Software Default Value RTP Only INI File Parameter Name srtpPreference Note Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed MKI on Transmit Stream Description Specifies if Master Key Index
223. messages from VoIP endpoint to render DTMF tones on the TDM interface regardless of the setting of this parameter Allowed Values On Off Default Value Off INI File Parameter Name gwSigDigitRelay Voice Activity Detection Description Enables the use of voice activity detection VAD to reduce the amount of audio data traffic If VAD is enabled the unit will stop the transmission of RTP audio data when no voice activity is detected on the telephony port Transmission is continued when voice activity is detected This drastically reduces the amount of audio traffic on the network Allowed Values e On Voice activity detection is enabled e Off Voice activity detection is disabled Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Default Value On INI File Parameter Name dspVAD RFC 3960 Early Media Support Description Specifies the Early Media mode to be supported by the gateway Allowed Values None Early Media support is disabled Always Early Media is enabled for all calls RFC 3960 Gateway Model OnDemand Early Media is enabled on a call by call basis INVITEs generated by the gateway will include early session in the Supported header while INVITEs received by the gateway must include early session in Supported header to request Early Media RFC 3960 Application Model Default Value OnDemand INI File Parameter Name sipEarl
224. mmand prompt type telnet followed by a space and the IP address of the Media Gateway Then press Enter 2 The telnet client connected message will appear Press Enter The following prompt will appear PIMG gt 3 At the prompt type pwd and then press Enter 4 When prompted enter the password for the Admin user the default is IpodAdmin and press Enter The Media Gateway will respond with Admin level accepted and then display the prompt You may now issue terminal commands to the Media Gateway 9 6 Trace Mechanism The trace mechanism has been designed to provide the maximum flexibility in tracing the various modules of the Media Gateway software The trace utility is supported by the serial port terminal as well as the telnet terminal and is available to users at Admin levels and above Therefore to enable the trace utility the user must log on to the terminal using a valid password Note The trace mechanism can be accessed via the Trace Capture interface as described in Section 9 4 2 Trace Capture on page 236 Information in this section includes e Trace Format e Trace Utility e Trace Commands Examples of Trace Commands and Displays The trace function allows the user to enable or disable different types of traces in different software modules It also allows the user to enable or disable traces that are related to the telephony ports on the Media Gateway Therefore control of telephony port traces is separate
225. n 3 15 Tone Detection Parameters on page 114 Learning and Validating Call Progress Tones Learning and validating a call progress tone is discussed in the following topics Learn Tone Web Page Learning the Characteristics of Unknown Call Progress Tones Learn Tone Progress Learn Tone Results e Validating Call Progress Tones Validate Tone Progress Validate Tone Results Learn Tone Web Page The Learn Tone Web page shown in Figure 10 allows you to acquire the characteristics for new call progress tones from the telephony system or to validate the defined call progress tones Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Call Progress Tones Figure 10 Learn Tone Web Page Dialagic m sa Cro pop op Colcsfiaf ej Summary Alarms Add Manual Tone Load Default Tone Table TOM VoIP e Sibi Call Log 7 3 Call Progress Tone Learn Call Progress Tone Validate iod Learn Tone Event Diakt Validate Tone Event Dialt v Configuration arn Tone Even ialtone y alidate Tone Event Dialtone Import Export Dial String Dial String P gt rocas Routing Table VolP TOM Serial Ports Tone Detection Certificates DSP Settings Diagnostics Trace Logging Tests System Password Progress Result Upgrade Restart The Learn Tone user interface has the following components of interest Acquire Tone field A check indicates that th
226. n Non Menu Hidden Parameters for ISDN Service Class Chapter 5 Routing Table updated screen shot and description in Inbound VoIP Rules to show support for Move Row Up and Move Row Down buttons 64 0346 05 May 2009 Updated to support Version 6 0 SU3 1 Software Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in Timing Group for T1 Multiplier Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new value Nortel_DMS 100 to ISDN Protocol Variant in T1 ISDN Protocol Group ISDN Signaling Mode Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added note to Enable Failover that this parameter is only applicable for DMG2060DTISQ and DMG2120DTISQ models in T1 ISDN Protocol Group ISDN Signaling Mode Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added note to Enable Failover that this parameter is only applicable for DMG2060DTISQ and DMG2120DTISQ models in E1 ISDN Protocol Group ISDN Signaling Mode 64 0346 04 March 2009 Updated to support Version 6 0 SU3 Software Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in User Agent Group for Reliable Provisional Responses Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in TLS Group for Verify TLS Peer Certificate Purpose Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in T1 CAS Protocol Group T1 CAS Signaling Mode for Inband Type CID to First Ring Timeout Chapter 3 Parameter Reference added new parameter in CPID Settings Group for CID to First Ring Timeout Chapter 3 Parameter R
227. n incoming transferred PBX call Receive call party identification CPID during incoming transfer Receive DTMF digits after transfer completed Message Waiting e Send message waiting notification request Set e Send no message waiting notification request Clear Restrictions The TDM self verification diagnostic is currently only available on PBX interfaces and protocols that allow the interfaces and channels to be individually assigned extension numbers and allows outbound and inbound call routing from one interface and channel to another The TDM self verification diagnostics is not available on any ISDN protocol Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 9 3 1 3 9 3 1 4 9 3 2 Diagnostics Capabilities The ability to route calls and send message waiting status updates through a particular PBX interface and channel is determined by the capabilities enabled state and if the interface and channel is in service If the interface and channel is not in service or is not enabled or it does not support the capability for the requested action then the interface and channel will not be used for routing through the gateway and will not be included in a diagnostic test To view and modify the capabilities and enabled state on a PBX interface and channel navigate to the Gateway gt Gateway Capabilities Web page on the Media Gateway Location The TDM self verification diagnostic tool
228. nable this feature to increase security However if the other party that the Media Gateway communicates with is not capable of generating a trust this feature must be disabled to avoid verification failure You may also leave this feature disabled if encrypting data is sufficient 7 3 3 TLS Examples The following examples show how the Media Gateway should be configured for using TLS Example 1 Assume the Media Gateway is talking to an IP phone that requires TLS and supports SIPS URI The Media Gateway can be configured as follows SNTP Server IP Address Leave blank TLS Inactivity Timer Use default value TLS Server port Use default value SIPS URI Scheme Enable Yes Cipher List Use default value Verify TLS Peer Certificate date No Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 209 Dialogic Corporation Data Security 7 4 7 4 1 210 Verify TLS Peer Certificate trust No Example 2 Assume a company has five sites one in Indiana one in Illinois one in California one in New York and one in Washington Each of these sites uses a local telephone company People at different sites frequently call each other They have decided to use VoIP service with one Media Gateway at each site They also use one media server A CA signed certificate which will expire in 1 year is used There is no convenient SNTP server Each of the five Media Gateways can be configured as follows SNTP Server IP Address
229. nd is capable of providing a connection The LED for this port may or may not be green depending on whether or not a line is plugged in No Port is disabled and is incapable of providing a connection The LED for this port will be red regardless of whether or not a line is plugged in Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name telPortEnabled TDM Call Type Group Allows the user to specify the type of number for the called and calling party information which then can be sent to PBX to decide the call type During a VoIP to ISDN call this call type information for called and calling party can be indicated to the PBX ISDN Call Type Rules The Web interface contains two independent divisions for called and calling party rules The management interface will allow user to create multiple rules to set the call type for inbound and outbound call numbers The user can define rules to assign call type for each calling and called party information for all outbound ISDN calls Rules are evaluated from the top down until a matching rule is found Figure 8 is a screen shot of the ISDN Call Type Rules Web page Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 103 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 104 Figure 8 ISDN Call Type Rules Web Page ISDN Call Type Rules AA i nad ear n n na Match Plan 7 Match Plan Typ Select Use this column to select a rule and change its priority Click and hold the left mouse
230. nge of 50 to 0 dBm Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 17 1 24 3 17 1 25 3 17 1 26 3 17 1 27 Parameter Reference Allowed Values 50 to 0 dBm Default Value 14 dBm INI File Parameter Name dspIpToPbxAgcLevel IP to PCM AGC Max Gain DMG2000 Only Description Defines the IP to PCM AGC maximum gain within the range of 0 to 15 dB Allowed Values 0 to 15 dB Default Value 12 dB INI File Parameter Name dspIpToPbxAgcMaxGain IP to PCM AGC Min Gain DMG2000 Only Description Defines the IP to PCM AGC minimum gain within the range of 0 to 15 dB Allowed Values 0 to 15 dB Default Value 15 dB INI File Parameter Name dspIpToPbxAgcMinGain TDM to IP AGC Enable DMG2000 Only Description Enables automatic gain control AGC in the PCM to IP direction Allowed Values e On AGC is enabled e Off AGC is disabled Default Value Off INI File Parameter Name dspPbxToIpAgcEnable TDM to IP AGC Slew Rate DMG2000 Only Description Determines the speed at which the AGC adapts in the PCM to IP direction Allowed Values Fast More emphasis on AGC gain adjustments Medium Mid point Slow More emphasis on Audio Quality Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 129 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 17 1 28 3 17 1 29 3 17 1 30 3 17 2 130 Default Value Medium INI File Parameter Name dspPb
231. nimum Alarm Severity Description Defines the minimum alarm severity level that generates an e mail notification Allowed Values Error Warning nfo Default Value Info INI File Parameter Name emailAlarmSeverity Destination E Mail List Description Semi colon delimited list of e mail addresses that will receive e mail alarms Allowed Values Semi colon delimited list of e mail addresses Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name emailList E Mail Server IP Address Description IP addresses of the SMTP e mail server that receive the e mail generated by the IP gateway Allowed Values Any valid IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value no default value INI File Parameter Name emailServerAddr Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 2 2 Note Parameter Reference Source E Mail Address Description E mail address used as source of e mail alarm messages Allowed Values Any valid e mail address Default Value alarm pbxgw com INI File Parameter Name emailSource SysLog Group The SysLog subgroup includes the following parameters e SysLog Server IP Address e Alarms to SysLog Enabled e SysLog Minimum Alarm Severity Diagnostics Trace to SysLog Enabled SysLog Server IP Address Description IP address of the SysLog RFC3164 server notifications sent to server s UDP port 514 Allowed Values Any valid IP address
232. nimum Alarm Severity SNMP Trap IP List e SNMP Community Name S S S Z NMP System Name NMP System Contact NMP System Location SNMP Traps Enabled Description Defines whether an SNMP trap is generated to signal an alarm Allowed Values e Yes SNMP trap is generated Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference e No SNMP trap is not generated Default Value No INI File Parameter Name snmpTrapEnabled SNMP Minimum Alarm Severity Description Defines the minimum alarm severity level to generate an SNMP trap Allowed Values Error Warning nfo Default Value Info INI File Parameter Name snmpAlarmSeverity SNMP Trap IP List Description Semi colon delimited list of the IP addresses of SNMP Managers who are to receive SNMP traps generated by the IP gateway Allowed Values Semi colon delimited list of IP addresses Default Value 255 255 255 255 INI File Parameter Name snmpTrapAddressList SNMP Community Name Description Specifies the SNMP Community name The specified community has read only capabilities Allowed Values Any string with length between 5 14 characters Default Value public INI File Parameter Name snmpCommunity Note Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed SNMP System Name Description Specifies the SNMP System name Allowed Values Any string with length between 0 63 chara
233. ntation of the source code herein It is the user s responsibility to properly design in this source code Include this copyright notice if there is a location the end user would be able to access Copyright 2002 Advanced Micro Devices Inc b SSL Implementation Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscape s SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the
234. nter the new password in the New Password box 7 Enter the new password a second time in the Confirm box Then click on the Change button to replace the old password with the new password 2 4 Configuration Procedure The Media Gateway is configured using a Web interface To change configuration parameter values through the Web interface use the following procedure 1 From a workstation connected to the Media Gateway via the Ethernet start the Web browser 2 Enter the IP address assigned to the Media Gateway For example http 10 12 13 74 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 35 Dialogic Corporation Media Gateway Configuration 2 5 2 6 36 3 When the System Login Web page appears enter admin in the User Name box and your password in the Password box then click on the Log On button The user name and password are case sensitive 4 Select the appropriate configuration Web page from the Configuration menu For example to define the PCM Coding as aLaw select the System Web page from the menu When the System Web page appears select aLaw from the drop down box as the PCM Coding parameter value 5 Click on the Apply Changes button to save the new configuration in the database or click on the Reset button to return the parameter to the previous value Note If the parameter whose value you are changing requires a restart for the change to take effect you will be prompted by a flashing Restart
235. o answer This means that when the regular expression is satisfied the first digits string is the destination number the second digit string is the source number and the reason code is no answer In order to describe the display a JOE 123 to BILL 456 b the rule might read rule w s d to w s d s src_number src_name dst_number dst_name reason origin internal bone This means that when the regular expression is satisfied the first digits string is the source number the second digits string is the destination number the first word string is the source name the second word string is the destination name and the reason code is at the end The origin of the call is internal Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 203 Dialogic Corporation Media Gateway Parsers 204 Rule Order The parser attempts to match an input integration or display string with a rule contained in the configuration data The rules are compared to the specified string from the top rule to the bottom rule Because of this rules that contain the most specific information should be listed in the configuration file first In this way exact matches can occur before a more generic catch all rule is reached If a rule does not match the parser attempts to match the next rule in the list If no rules match then the integration parsing fails For this reason the last rule in the rule list should be a very generi
236. o your PC After saving you can view the file using most any ASCII text editor such as Wordpad or Notepad Figure 50 File Download Dialog Box for Trace log File Download xi Do you want to open or saye this file Name trace log Type Text Document From 172 16 3 48 Open Save ES While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially 2 harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this file What s the risk Important points to remember about Trace Capture are After modifying the trace keys be sure to click Apply Masks e tis not necessary to stop logging to change trace keys The keys can be changed on the fly Downloading the Trace Capture clears the log and starts a new log file e Stopping the log and then restarting it does not clear the log new data is just appended to the log 238 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics The DMG1000 log can store up to 1 5 Mbytes while the DMG2000 log can store up to 32 Mbytes Trace Capture is automatically enabled at power on with Error Debug and Init trace masks for all trace keys 9 4 3 Network Capture The Network Capture creates an in memory log of Media Gateway IP traffic Since there can be a great deal of traffic the Network Capture control page allows filtering of IP packets Filtering packets makes it easier to analyze problems by reducing the nu
237. oIP Prot VoIP Prot INVITE sip 101 10 0 1 215 Transport udp SIP 2 0 VoIP Prot From 250 lt sip port1 10 0 1 110 5060 gt user phone tag 1A1F32463135364100000ABE VoIP Prot To sip 101810 0 1 2151 VoIP Prot Content Type application SDP VoIP Prot Call ID 01B2270D9C81400000000006 pbxgw default com VoIP Prot CSeq 1 INVITE VoIP Prot Allow Events refer message summary VoIP Prot Expires 120 VoIP Prot Via SIP 2 0 UDP 10 0 1 110 5060 VoIP Prot Contact lt sip port1 10 0 1 110 5060 gt VoIP Prot User Agent DMG1000 VoIP Prot Max Forwards 70 VoIP Prot Supported 100rel timer VoIP Prot Content Length 216 VoIP Prot VoIP Prot v 0 VoIP Prot o phone 26533 0 IN IP4 10 0 1 110 VoIP Prot s VoIP Prot GSIN IP4 10 0 1 110 VoIP Prot t 0 0 VoIP Prot m audio 49010 RTP AVP 0 8 101 VoIP Prot a rtpmap 0 PCMU 8000 1 VoIP Prot a rtpmap 8 PCMA 8000 1 VoIP Prot a rtpmap 101 telephone event 8000 VoIP Prot a fmtp 101 0 15 VoIP Prot a sendrecv Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 251 Diagnostics VoIP Prot VoIP Prot 81P 2 0 100 Trying VoIP Prot Via SIP 2 0 UDP 10 0 1 110 5060 VoIP Prot Call ID 01B2270D9C8140000000000680pbxgw default com VoIP Prot CSeq 1 INVITE VoIP Prot From 250 lt sip port1410 0 1 110 5060 gt user phone tag 1A1F32463135364100000ABE VoIP Prot To sip 101 10 0 1 215 tag 3246313536412A29002
238. of the rule CPID matching etc are identical between the primary and alternate routes Figure 23 is a screen shot of the Select Primary Alternate Route configuration Web page Figure 23 Select Primary Alternate Route Configuration Web Page 5 2 4 5 2 4 1 Outbound Routes Device Selection Outbound HostGroup 1 Destination CPID Manipulation Redirect R Number Redirect R Name O primary Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 4 Add Altemate Route TDM Trunk Groups TDM Trunk Groups are logical groupings of ports and channels that define the physical port for the TDM side of the call The port is a physical connection to the gateway i e ISDN span Analog line while the channel is a logical connection within the port i e T1 CAS line includes up to 24 channels while an Analog line has a single channel All incoming TDM calls arrive on a physical port and a channel TDM Trunk Groups are a way of identifying the port channel combination For some calls it may be necessary to select the specific port and channel from a group of possible options TDM Trunk Groups define how this is selected The configuration of TDM Trunk Groups are used for the routing of requests from to the TDM network TDM Trunk Groups are referenced by Inbound TDM Rules and Inbound VoIP Rules TDM Trunk Groups are used to match inbound requests with routing rules and to specify outbound routes to the TDM network TDM Port Types The gateway supports multi
239. of the CA that signed the CSR is configured into the PC running the Web browser used to connect to the Media Gateway via HTTPS e The user logs into the Media Gateway by going to https URL HTTPS is automatically used when accessing all the subsequent Web pages The choice of either self signed or CA signed certificates depends on the system administration and the desired level of trust within the system Self signed certificates are generated by the Media Gateway and therefore do not cost any money and may require less time to install A self signed certificate is simply downloaded from the gateway and installed on the PC running the Web browser used to connect to the Media Gateway via HTTPS However when self signed certificates are used the PC Web Browser must have a unique certificate installed for each Media Gateway with which it will communicate This process could get lengthy if the PC Web Browser needs to communicate with a number of Media Gateway units On the other hand CA signed certificates require time and effort to install since the certificates must be signed by a CA However once you have the signed certificate the CA root certificate can be used to communicate with multiple Media Gateway units Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 7 2 2 7 3 Data Security HTTPS Example An example of how HTTPS is used with a self signed certificate is described below In the example
240. oint answers the call request In this case the CPID information will not be part of the initial call request to the VoIP endpoint This parameter is valid only when the gateway is configured to receive Type II CPID post answer CPID Allowed Values Yes Gateway will auto answer the inbound TDM call e No Gateway will not auto answer the inbound TDM call Default Value No INI File Parameter Name telAutoAnswer TDM Digital Parameters The TDM Digital subgroup includes the following parameter Telephony Switch Type Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 101 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 10 102 Note Note Note Note Telephony Switch Type Description Specifies the type of PBX telephony switch to which the DMG1000 is connected This parameter does not apply to the Models DMG1008MTLDNIW DMG1008LSW DMG1004LSW DMG2030DTIQ DMG2060DTIQ and DMG2120DTIQ The list of allowed values that will be displayed depends on your model type Allowed Values None No PBX Type has been selected e MI Nortel Meridian 1 Meridian SL 1 Norstar Nortel Norstar Key Systems Optiset 300ECS Siemens Hicom 300E CS e Optiset_300E Siemens Hicom 300E Lucent Lucent DEFINITY G3 Magix Merlin Magix NEC IMG NEC IMG NEC IMX NEC IMX NEC NEAX NEC NEAX or NEC 2400 IPX Rolm 8000 Rolm 8000 Rolm 9751 SW9005 Rolm 9751 with software release 9005 or earli
241. ol Web page does not exist for Mitel or Rolm DMG1000 units The Serial Protocol parameters are used to define the serial protocol used in the connection to the PBX serial link These parameters include e Serial Mode Master Slave e Serial Interface Protocol MCI Message Extension Length MCI Message Type CPID Length CPID Padding String Voice Mail Port Length e System Number MWI Response Timeout Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 14 1 Note Note 3 14 2 Note 3 14 3 Parameter Reference e IP Address of Serial Server e Serial CPID Expiration Serial Mode Master Slave Description Specifies if the Media Gateway is using the serial protocol and if so whether the unit is the Serial Protocol Master or Slave The Media Gateway must be configured as the Master if it is physically connected to the serial link of the PBX In a system with multiple Media Gateways only one of the units can be connected to the serial link of the PBX This unit is the Serial Protocol Master and all other Media Gateways are considered to be the slaves The master and slaves use the IP network to communicate serial protocol information to each other Allowed Values None Serial link is not used Master This Media Gateway is connected to the PBX serial link Slave This Media Gateway is part of a multiple configuration but is not connected to the PBX serial link
242. on Specifies the text name associated with this tone definition Allowed Values String with length between 0 31 characters Default Value Empty string INI File Parameter Name cpToneName Cadence Type Description Specifies the cadence type for this tone definition Allowed Values Continuous an on tone with no off OnOff an on cadence followed by an off cadence OnOffQuick detection is reported at the end of the off period following the first valid on period e Alternating two tones that alternate with no off time in between e Sequential one two or three tones that come in sequence Default Value Continuous INI File Parameter Name cpCadenceType Number of Cadence Cycles Description Specifies the number of cadence cycles for this tone definition Allowed Values 1 10 Default Value 2 INI File Parameter Name cpCadenceNumCycles Tone Frequency Description Specifies the frequencies for this tone definition A tone can be described by up to three 3 frequencies For Alternating and Sequential Tones the top frequency is the first frequency the middle frequency is the second frequency and the bottom frequency is the third frequency A value of 0 means to ignore the entry Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Allowed Values 0 2000 Hz Default Value 0 INI File Parameter Name cpToneFre
243. on 114 Serial Interface Protocol 111 Serial Mode Master Slave 111 Serial Port Baud Rate 108 109 Serial Port Data Bits 108 110 Serial Port Parity 108 109 Serial Port Stop Bits 108 110 Server Port 58 59 Signaling Digit Relay Mode 68 Signaling Mode 79 SIP Phone Context From 138 SIP Phone Context To 138 SIP User Phone Enabled 139 SNMP Community Name 51 SNMP System Contact 52 SNMP System Location 52 SNMP System Name 51 SNMP Trap IP List 51 SNMP Traps Enabled 50 51 SNTP Server IP Address 43 Source E Mail Address 49 SRTP Preference 70 Start Port for RTP 139 Static TDM Calling Party El 93 System Number 113 T1 CAS Protocol 80 T1 Multiplier 64 T1 Time 63 64 T2 Time 63 TCP Inactivity Timer 59 60 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 263 Dialogic Corporation TDM CPID Parsing Configuration 107 TDM to IP Gain Adjustment 123 Telephony Port Enabled 103 Telephony Port Interface Side 80 Telnet Server Enabled 53 TLS Certificate Type 121 Tone Cadence Time 117 Tone Cadence Time Deviation 117 Tone Event 115 Tone Frequency 116 Tone Frequency Deviation 117 Tone Name 116 Transfer Feature Code 83 95 Transport Type 54 Turn MWI Off FAC 77 Turn MWI On FAC 77 Unauthenticated SRTP Enable 139 UnEncrypted SRTCP Enable 140 UnEncrypted SRTP Enable 140 Use Same Port for MWI Clear Set Analog 98 Use Same Port for MWI Clear Set T1 85 Verify TLS Peer Certificate Date 61 Verify
244. on Simulate Route the Outbound Route s Host should change The following table shows this Outbound Route 178 VoIP Device Bridged Method cycles through these Host 172 16 3 1 172 16 3 2 172 16 3 3 0 IP Port 156 Calling Number Bill Calling Name 213 Called Number Mary Called Name Redirect Number Redirect Name Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Example 3 Basic Call with CPID manipulation System Configuration Media Server T1 Gateway WAN Central Office T1 PBX Requirements Routing Requirements 1 All inbound TDM calls must be routed to the media server IP address 172 13 4 3 2 Allinbound VoIP calls must be routed out the TDM Any available TDM channel can be used CPID manipulation Requirements Inbound VoIP calls e The VoIP calls use E 164 format We must translate from E 164 to format acceptable by a T1 line e Calling amp Called Numbers of the form 1 YY Yxxxxxxx where Y Y Y is the area code and XXXXXXxX is the phone number must be changed to 91 Y Y Yxxxxxxx e Calling amp Called Number of the form ZZxxxxxxxx where ZZ is the country code and XXXXXXxx is the phone number must be changed to 9011ZZxxxxxxxx Inbound TDM calls e We must translate from the T1 format to E 164 e Calling amp Calle
245. onsult Call Connected Drop Code Description Defines the Feature Code to dial in order to drop a Consult call that is in the Connected state and to reconnect to the original call Allowed Values A string from 0 to 10 digits in length using any of the following characters 0 9 EH Default Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Gateway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flash operation INI File Parameter Name telFacCDropCon Consult Call Disconnected Drop Code Description Defines the Feature Code to dial in order to drop a Consult call that is in the Disconnected state and to reconnect to the original call Allowed Values A string from 0 to 10 digits in length using any of the following characters 0 9 dh Default Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Gateway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flash operation INI File Parameter Name telFacCDropDis Consult Call Error Drop Code Description Defines the Feature Code to dial in order to drop a Consult call that is in the Error state and to reconnect to the original call Allowed Values Dialable number including for flash hook and p for pause Default Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Gateway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flas
246. onsult call that is in the Disconnected state and to reconnect to the original call Allowed Values A string from 0 to 10 digits in length using any of the following characters 0 9 ie Default Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Gateway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flash operation INI File Parameter Name telFacCDropDis Consult Call Error Drop Code Description Defines the Feature Code to dial in order to drop a Consult call that is in the Error state and to reconnect to the original call Allowed Values Dialable number including for flash hook and p for pause Default Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Gateway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flash operation INI File Parameter Name telFacCDropError Message Waiting Control Group The Analog parameters in the Message Waiting Control group include e MWI Confirmation Tone e Use Same Port for MWI Clear Set Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 97 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 8 3 1 3 8 3 2 3 8 4 98 Note MWI Confirmation Tone Description Specifies whether or not the PBX sends a confirmation tone to signal the successful completion of a Message Waiting Indication MWI request Allowed Values e Yes PBX will send a confirmation tone
247. ontent tab Click the Certificates button Select the Trusted Root Certificate Authorities tab Click the Import button Click Next Browse to the cer file Click Next You should see the following screen Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Data Security Figure 33 Storing Self Signed Certificate by Certificate Import Wizard Certificate Import Wizard Certificate Store Certificate stores are system areas where certificates are kept Windows can automatically select a certificate store or you can specify a location for Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate 3 Place all certificates in the Following store Certificate store Trusted Root Certification Authorities Browse 11 If the Certificate store is not Trusted Root Certification Authorities use the Browse button to locate it 12 Click Next 13 Click Finish 14 Click Yes 15 Click the OK button 16 Close the windows and Internet Explorer Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 213 Dialogic Corporation Data Security 214 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Unit Status Status information about the Dialogic 1000 Media Gateway DMG1000 and Dialogic 2000 Media Gateway DMG2000 units can be obtained through the Web interface 8 The DMG1000 Status and DMG20
248. ored to determine on line status Valid only if there are VoIP Host Groups in the Routing Table that have Fault Tolerance enabled Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 65 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 4 3 4 1 66 Note Allowed Values 10 3600 Default Value 30 INI File Parameter Name gwMonitorVoipHostsIntSec VoIP Media Parameters The VoIP Media parameters include the following subgroups Audio Group Fax Group e SRTP Group Audio Group The Audio subgroup includes the following parameters Audio Compression RTP Digit Relay Mode RTP Fax Modem Tone Relay Mode RTP Source IP Address Validation RTP Source UDP Port Validation e Signaling Digit Relay Mode Voice Activity Detection e Codec Frame Size Frames Per Packet e RFC 3960 Early Media Support Audio Compression Description Sets the audio coder decoder to be used by the Media Gateway Allowed Values e G 711u G 711a G 711 uLaw preferred G 711 aLaw secondary e G 711u G 711 uLaw only e G 71la G 711 aLaw only e G 723 1 G 723 1 only e G 729AB G 729AB only Default Value G 711u G 711a INI File Parameter Name dspCompression Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference RTP Digit Relay Mode Description Selects the Realtime Transfer Protocol RTP method by which dual tone multi
249. otocol level When an interface is enabled Capture you have the ability to filter not log different protocols A check mark in the box means the Gateway will not log packets of the corresponding protocol To use the Network Capture first select the interfaces to capture check the protocols you do not want to log click Apply Filters and then click Start Capturing Logging starts and the display changes to show the state of the log An example of a running log is shown in Figure 52 Figure 52 Example of Running Log Network Capture Trace Logging Go ar When the Network Capture is running the fill level of the log is displayed The log uses a circular buffer so when it reaches capacity new data overwrites the old Once the log reaches capacity the fill level does not change The log can be transferred to a PC by clicking Download Doing this brings up a File Download dialog box as shown in Figure 53 Select Save to save the file to the PC After saving you can view the file with any network capture program that supports libpcap format e g Ethereal Figure 53 File Download Dialog Box for Iplog pcap File Download xi Do you want to open or saye this file A Name iplog pcap Type Wireshark file From 172 16 3 48 Open Save harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or o While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially 7 savethis file What s t
250. ount invalid_mac_header_count invalid ssrc count invalid payload count Voice Playout Stats avg_playout_delay lost_packet_count replay_packet_count idle_packet_count dropped_packet_count rx_packet_count avg_frame_jitter adpt_po_buf_delay_inc adpt_po_buf_delay_dec po_buf_underflow_cnt cell_starve_evt_cnt Receive Transmit Stats Rx Voice Packets Tx Voice Packets Tx Silence Suppressed Frames Rx Min Jitter Rx Max Jitter Rx RTP Avg Jitter Tx Grant Sync Dropped Frames Tx Octets Rx Octets AAL2 Coding Profile Changes DTMF Tx Packets DTMF Rx Packets SID Rx Packets SID Tx Packets Tx Last Timestamp Tx Extended Seq Number Tx Last Seq Number AAL2 UUI Tx Last Pkt Type Rx Last Pkt Type Rx Last Timestamp Rx Last Ssrc Rx Extended Seq Number Rx Last Seq Number AAL2 UUI Pkt Lost by Network Rx P2P Packets to Hosts Rx P2P Filtered Packets P2P Squelched Voice Packets Rx Net Packets Tx Net Packets Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation NP Sse XO QOO uo C OO OO oOo 0o o0oo o e oooonooooon n 3 a 1 51 506 0 30 ms 30 ms O pcm samples 0 40480 36480 0 UcUucoocooco 0 67547 1368282060 0 151 Diagnostics 253 Diagnostics 254 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi 1 DspCpi
251. ove CSI from TDM to reduce packet delay e Off Include CSI in packet sent to packet network Default Value Off INI File Parameter Name dspT38CsiRemovalEnable NSF Removal DMG2000 Only Description Determines if Non Standard Facilities NSF is removed Allowed Values On Remove NSF from TDM to reduce packet delay e Off Include NSF in packet sent to packet network Default Value Off INI File Parameter Name dspT38NsfRemovalEnable DIS Removal DMG2000 Only Description Determines if the Digital Identification signal DIS is removed Allowed Values On Remove DIS from TDM to reduce packet delay Off Include DIS in packet sent to packet network Default Value Off INI File Parameter Name dspT38DisRemovalEnable Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 17 2 8 3 17 2 9 3 17 2 10 3 17 2 11 Parameter Reference T 38 Packet Loss Concealment Method DMG2000 Only Description Selects the packet loss concealment method in T 38 Allowed Values None No T 38 Packet Concealment White Line Replace bad line with white line Last Good Line Replace bad line with last good line Default Value White Line INI File Parameter Name dspT38PacketLossConcealment T 38 UDPTL Redundancy Count for Fax Page Data DMG2000 Only Description Specifies the number of redundant IFP frames transferred with each UDPTL packet Allowed Values 0
252. oy the Software or return all copies of the Software to Dialogic at Your cost APPLICABLE LAWS Claims arising under this Software License Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the Province of Quebec excluding its principles of conflict of laws and the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the Sale of Goods ADDITIONAL TERMS Dialogic is not obligated under any other agreements unless they are in writing and signed by an authorized representative of Dialogic All notices to Dialogic under this Agreement shall be sent to Dialogic s legal department at 9800 Cavendish Blvd 5th Floor Montreal Quebec Canada H4M2V9 In the event that any provision of this Agreement is found to be invalid the remainder of the Agreement shall remain in full force and effect and the closest legally valid alternative provision giving effect to the intention of the original severed invalid clause shall be deemed to be included in this Agreement APPLICABLE THIRD PARTY LICENSE INFORMATION a AMD Flash API Memory Drivers 1 1 The AMD Flash API Memory Drivers 1 1 is distributed subject to the terms on AMD s website which are as follows This software constitutes a basic shell of source code for programming all AMD flash components AMD will not be responsible for misuse or illegal use of this software for devices not supported herein AMD is providing this source code AS IS and will not be responsible for issues arising from incorrect user impleme
253. packet transmitted from the Media Gateway with a QOS byte code Routers use this byte code to assign priority levels to packets The QOS byte may be interpreted as either IPv4 TOS or DiffServ IPv4 TOS Byte Bits 0 2 Precedence RFC 1122 3 6 Type of Service RFC 1349 1455 7 Must be zero PrecedenceBits 0 2 111xxxxx 224 Network Control 110xxxxx 192 Internetwork Control 101xxxxx 160 CRITIC ECP 100xxxxx 128 Flash Override 011xxxxx 96 Flash 010xxxxx 64 Immediate 001xxxxx 32 Priority 000xxxxx 0 Routine Type of Service Bits 3 6 xxx0000x 0 Normal xxx1000x 16 Minimize delay xxx0100x 8 Maximize throughput xxx0010x 4 Maximize reliability xxx0001x 2 Minimize monetary cost xxx1111x 30 Maximize physical link security XXX 32 Priority xxx 0 Routine Default Value 0 Routine Normal Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 73 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference DiffServ Codepoint Byte Bits 0 5 Differentiated Services Codepoint RFC 2474 6 7 Explicit Congestion Notification RFC 2481 Allowed Values 0 255 Default Value 0 INI File Parameter Name gwQosCallControl RTP QOS Type Description The RTP QOS Type parameter defines a decimal value that represents QOS bit flags This parameter is used in each RTP data packet transmitted from the Media Gateway with a QOS byte code Routers use this byte code to assign priority le
254. ple types of TDM ports The number of physical ports and channels supported vary Table 13 shows the possibilities Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 165 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table 166 Table 13 TDM Port Types Maximum number of Number of supported Gateway Type supported ports channels per port Analog 8 1 Digital PBX 8 1 T1 CAS 4 24 T1 ISDN 4 23 E1 4 30 Figure 24 is a sample screen shot of the TDM Trunk Groups configuration Web page Figure 24 TDM Trunk Groups Configuration Web Page Router Configuration O Inbound TDM Rules Inbound VoIP Rules 9 TDM Trunk Groups VoIP Host Groups TDM Trunk Groups See ETE E O O Delete IAE Dele mts IC CIO Add Trunk Group The selected Trunk Group is referenced by the folloving rules inbound TDM Extension match Trunk Group inbound VoIP Local Primary Route Name Defines the name of the trunk group This name is referenced by routing rules that use the trunk group Each group must have a unique name Selection Direction Specifies the method of channel selection when selecting channels from the trunk group for outbound requests Descending Channels are selected from highest channel number to lowest Ascending Channels are selected from lowest channel number to highest Selection Mode Specifies the method of channel selection when selecting
255. porting and Exporting Configuration Information The Import Export Web page allows you to import or export Media Gateway configuration information to a ini file on the host machine connected to the Media Gateway via the Web interface Scenarios where importing or exporting the configuration information may be useful include Backup configuration It is recommended that after configuring the Media Gateway you backup the configuration information by exporting it to a ini file If at some time in the future Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Media Gateway Configuration the configuration has been changed and now you wish to return to the previous configuration you can import the previous configuration data back to the Media Gateway Multiple unit implementation At a site where there are multiple Media Gateway units much of the configuration will be the same between units e g Audio Parameters SIP Parameters etc An installer could configure the first unit export the ini file edit the unit specific parameters in the ini file e g IP Address using Notepad and then import the modified file to the next unit This will speed up and simplify the installation procedure at larger sites Support If the Web interface is inaccessible to customer support you can export the configuration information to a ini file and then email the file to customer support for them to view the
256. progress CP tone was detected The detected CP tone is listed in the error message Failed Validation Timeout When the Gateway dialed the destination address to validate the tone no CP tone was detected Validated Tones The tones listed in this section were successfully validated Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 149 Dialogic Corporation Call Progress Tones 150 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Routing Table 5 1 5 1 1 Information about Routing Table and how it is supported by the Dialogic Media Gateway is described in the following sections Ro ting Table OVOrVIBW vi ucseRenekk rm ERROR ERG HORE AA RA 151 Router COND EUISBON 1bbebl scicbbrsiQX4eX A AA RR ERA EERE REC 152 Cun Hir PTT ccr 169 e dall Boutng EXSmplbs bebe Ek dido owe dde 170 Routing Table Overview The Routing Table previously referred to as the Dial Plan describes a set of rules used to define the characteristics of a call routed through the gateway It allows telephony requests to be processed if the inbound information is matched against configured set of rules and determines if there is an available outbound route for the request The primary characteristics include the destination address and the CPID call party identification information The Routing Table affects calls originating from the VoIP side and calls originating from the TDM T1 El analog etc
257. ptions to choose from when restarting the unit Restart Unit Now Clicking this button will cause the unit to restart immediately Restart Unit When Idle Clicking this button will cause the unit to restart when the unit is considered in the idle state In the idle state there are no calls incoming outgoing or connected on any of the PBX ports of the Media Gateway By selecting this option you will schedule a restart time that minimizes the effect the restart will have on call traffic through the unit 1 6 Online Help Context sensitive online Help is provided for the various Web pages When you move the mouse pointer over a parameter name the pointer changes from an arrow to a symbol and Help information about that parameter is displayed at the top of the page Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 31 Dialogic Corporation Overview 32 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Media Gateway Configuration 2 Information about configuring and upgrading the Dialogic 1000 Media Gateway DMG1000 and Dialogic 2000 Media Gateway DMG2000 is contained in the following sections Aettne the IP Added 33 Basic Configuration Via the Serial Port cio oonirrcniar a aes e rra 34 hanpne the Paserotd siii 35 Configuraion Procede sida ee Et Edd e bd dd aeree A Restant ODBOlNS sunrise 36 e Importing and Exporting Configuration Information
258. q 3 15 0 7 Tone Frequency Deviation Description Specifies the deviation for the tone frequencies for this tone definition Allowed Values 0 200 Hz Default Value 0 INI File Parameter Name cpToneFreqDeviation 3 15 0 8 Tone Cadence Time Description Specifies the cadence times for this tone definition A tone can be described by up to three 3 cadence times The interpretation of each time parameter is dependent on the selection of Cadence Type For a given cadence type Cadence Time specifies the time in milliseconds Continuous The first time value specifies the minimum time on that must elapse before the tone on event is generated e OnOff The first two time values are used to specify the on time and off time respectively OnOffQuick The first time value is used to specify the minimum on time that causes detection and the second time value specifies the maximum off time that causes a cadence break Alternating The first two time values specify the on time for the corresponding frequency component e Sequential For each of the tones in the sequence the corresponding time value specifies the on time for the tone Allowed Values 0 10000 milliseconds Default Value 1500 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name cpToneTime 3 15 0 9 Tone Cadence Time Deviation Description Specifies the deviation for the cadence times for this tone definition Allowed Values 0 1000 milliseconds Default Value 700 milliseconds Dialogic
259. quired to view or playback the file Control of Log Files The control of each log file is independent i e more than one log can be simultaneously created and is administered via the Media Gateway s Web interface You reach the logging pages by using the Diagnostic Web page shown in Figure 47 Figure 47 Diagnostic Web Page 9 4 2 236 Trace Logging ortae sat Network Capture In summarizing the overview of Diagnostic Logging remember Logging is available on Media Gateway Version 5 0 Software and later The DMG1000 provides two logs Trace capture and Network capture The DMG2000 provides three logs Trace capture Network capture and TDM capture The Media Gateway stores the logs in RAM Therefore the logs are not preserved if the unit is reset or powered down To save a log you must transfer it to a PC e Special applications are not required to download logs from the Media Gateway to a PC but are required to view the logs Allcontrol of logging is through the Web interface Trace Capture The Trace Capture enhances the trace mechanism described in Section 9 6 Trace Mechanism on page 244 Specifically it allows users to set the trace mask via the Web page in addition to allowing the trace output to be redirected to a log file that can then be downloaded The DMG2000 Trace Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics Captu
260. r Yes Character to right is literal quoted character Yes 2 0 or 1 of preceding character No il 0 or more of preceding character Yes 1 or more of preceding character No A reason code or call origin character No d Digit character call party number Yes D Non digit character No w Word character call party name Must start with alpha No then can be alpha digit comma space or _ s Whitespace character Space newline or tab No b Word boundary Whitespace punctuation beginning or end No of text Used to specify that strings are bounded at start or end of string Not explicitly searched for Checked on reasons digits and literal strings Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Media Gateway Parsers Table 14 Parser Regular Expressions Continued Characters and Pursues Analog Parsing Meta Characters P Applicable Minn Octal control character No min max Braces Follows other chars If non null length must be Yes within min max Rule Syntax A call class rule starts with the tag rule All characters following the tag define the rule Following the rule are specifiers that define the location in the integration or display string of the call party information For example to describe the integration string A1500 300 the rule might read rule Al d 0 10 d 0 10 dst_number JE src number 2 reason n
261. r 4 Call Progress Tones Certificates Selecting Certificates brings up the Certificates Web page which allows you to configure Certificates parameters For detailed information about the Certificates parameters see Section 3 16 Certificates Parameters on page 121 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Overview DSP Settings Selecting DSP Settings brings up the DSP Settings Web page which allows you to configure DSP Settings parameters For detailed information about the DSP Settings parameters see Section 3 17 DSP Settings Parameters on page 122 The System Web pages provide the system administrator with an interface to change password upgrade system and restart system Password Selecting Password brings up the Password Web page This page allows you to change your password For information about the procedure for changing your password see Section 2 3 Changing the Password on page 35 Upgrade Selecting Upgrade brings up the Upgrade Web page The Upgrade Web page allows you to upgrade the Media Gateway software For information about the procedure for upgrading the software see Section 2 7 Upgrading the Software on page 38 Restart Selecting Restart from the Configuration menu brings up the Restart Web page which allows you to restart the Media Gateway Restarting the unit is required when certain parameter values are changed You have two o
262. r frequency 3 Allowed Values Number between 80 3 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 119 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Note 3 15 1 11 Note 3 15 1 12 Note 3 15 1 13 Note 3 15 2 120 INI File Parameter Name cpGenToneAmpDbm3 This is a ini file parameter only Call Progress Tone Generation Amplitude 4 dBm Description Amplitude for frequency 4 Allowed Values Number between 80 3 INI File Parameter Name cpGenToneAmpDbm4 This is a ini file parameter only Call Progress Generation Cadence On Time Description Specifies the on time interval for the cadence element in milliseconds Allowed Values Number between 0 10000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name cpGenToneOnTimeMs This is a ini file parameter only Call Progress Generation Cadence Off Time Description Specifies the off time interval for the cadence element in milliseconds Allowed Values Number between 0 10000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name cpGenToneOffTimeMs This is a ini file parameter only Editing the INI File Directly The call progress tone parameters can be edited directly in the INI file if desired In older versions of the INI file 16 tone definitions were listed regardless of the number of actual tone definitions in use In these older INI files unused tone definitions would have the cpToneEvent parameter set to none In newer versions of the INI file only
263. ration Overview 30 The Media Gateway s Web interface is divided into four sections Status Configuration Diagnostics and System The Status Web pages provide run time information and statistics about the operation of the unit The Diagnostics Web pages provide the system administrator with an interface to perform diagnostics tasks The Configuration Web pages provide the system administrator with an interface to configure the Media Gateway The Configuration menu selections include Import Export Selecting Import Export brings up the Import Export Web page which allows you to save a copy of your current configuration Export to a directory on the computer or to import a configuration file to the Media Gateway Import For information about exporting a configuration file see Section 2 6 1 Exporting Configuration Information on page 37 For information about importing a configuration file see Section 2 6 2 Importing Configuration Information on page 38 IP Selecting IP brings up the IP Web page which allows you to configure the IP parameters For detailed information about the IP parameters see Section 3 1 IP Settings on page 41 Management Protocols Selecting Management Protocols brings up the Management Protocols Web page which allows you to configure E mail Syslog SNMP Web Server and Telnet parameters For detailed information about the Management Protocols parameters see Section 3 2 Mana
264. re control page is shown in Figure 48 While the DMG2000 control page has more trace keys the ideas presented in this section apply equally to both the DMG1000 and the DMG2000 Figure 48 Trace Capture Control Page DMG2000 Trace Mask Control ik i f Uncheck all it f Uncheck all Uncheck all i al al E epe f event _ m LE LE E ECM m EN m m EN m E c 0 Gans nies E E gt gt gt m m m m E K LE m Submit Cancel Figure 48 shows the default trace keys i e immediately after power up Notice the Error and Trace masks are not shown as they are always enabled Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 237 Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics To use the Trace Capture first check the appropriate trace masks Click Apply Masks and then click Start Logging Logging starts and the display changes to show the state of the log An example of a running log is shown in Figure 49 Figure 49 Example of a Running Log Trace Capture Trace Logging When the Trace Capture is running the fill level of the log is displayed The log uses a circular buffer so when it reaches capacity new data overwrites the old Once the log reaches capacity the fill level does not change The log can be transferred to a PC by clicking Download Doing this brings up a File Download dialog box as shown in Figure 50 Select Save to save the file t
265. restart 9 7 3 The Ping command generates ICMP requests to the specified IP address This is useful in determining connection status to IP endpoints gateways or routers Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation OK 0 1 110 0 1 3 0 1 63 Active In In In In In In In Service Service Service Service Service Service Service Restart Command Ping Command 255 Diagnostics 9 7 4 9 7 5 256 PIMG gt ping 10 0 1 1 10 0 1 1 is alive PIMG gt ping 10 0 1 1 5 PING 10 0 1 1 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10 0 1 1 icmp_seq 0 time 2 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 1 1 icmp_seq 1 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 1 1 icmp_seq 2 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 1 1 icmp_seq 3 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 1 1 icmp_seq 4 time 0 ms 10 0 1 1 PING Statistics 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 0 packet loss round trip ms min avg max 0 0 2 PIMG gt ping 10 10 10 10 no answer from 10 10 10 10 Ver Command The Ver command outputs the versions of all hardware and firmware of the unit PIMG gt ver Description Version DSP 9 1 THU AUG 29 15 22 54 2002 Flash App lab_D THU NOV 21 16 20 47 2002 Flash DSP 9 1 THU AUG 29 15 22 54 2002 Boot dhcp WED NOV 20 12 48 16 2002 CPLD 0x21 iNIM App 6 6 iNIM FPGA 179 iNIM Boot 5 0 Base HW 2 Alarm List Command The Alarm List command outputs the current list of generated system alarms Th
266. rface 5 e e e e e NimCtlDc NIM DirectConnect Interface 5 e e e e e PBXTest PBX Self Test Application 12 e e e e e LTA LearnTone Application 12 e e e e e NOTES 1 Currently SIP only enable to trace SIP packets 2 Serial Interface API only active if serial mode enabled 3 Active only if in phone driving mode 4 Active only on AMI DMG1000 5 Active only in Direct Connect mode 6 enable to see telephony hookswitch lamps voice state CPID displays tone detection call progress and dtmf 7 enable to trace RTP packet and error statistics during a media session 8 enable to trace telephony protocol packets encoded in release version 9 enable to trace serial telephony interface packets serial server only 10 enable to trace SIP Trillium code 11 enable to trace iNim DMG1000 interface protocol 12 Active only if feature is run 13 DMG1000 only 14 DMG2000 only 15 RAW ISDN layer 3 messages 9 6 2 2 Trace Type Trace type defines the level of tracing For example to capture only errors for the Volp trace key the trace type would be set to trace voip error on The following table describes the trace types that are supported Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 247 Diagnostics Table 18 Supported Trace Types Trace Types Trace Description Prot Protocol Code Software Code Error Errors 1 Warn Warnings Init Software Devi
267. rity but not all devices support this feature Key Derivation Rate KDR This parameter is only usable if Key Derivation Enabled is set to Yes KDR takes values of 16 to 24 When 0 is specified the session key is only derived once which is the same as when Key derivation Enabled set to No However if key derivation rate is to a value greater than 0 a new session key from the same master key is derived whenever the audio data packet index reaches the multiple of 2KDR For example if KDR is 16 216 65536 The session key will be derived whenever a packet index reaches 65536 2 65536 3 65536 etc Cipher Mode Cipher is the algorithm used to encrypt decrypt a packet The Media Gateway supports plain text or AES counter mode When plain text is specified no encryption decryption is performed on the audio data and Authentication is skipped By default the Media Gateway supports the AES counter mode Note Plain Text is not supported in Version 5 1 SU2 Software Authentication Type The Media Gateway supports no authentication or SHA1 It is recommended that you use authentication whenever the cipher is non null as it provides more security Authentication tag length When SHA1 is used the tag can be 32 bits or 80 bits By default the Media Gateway supports SHA1 80 bits Secure Voice Data Examples The following examples show how the Media Gateway should be configured for SRTP Example1 In this example the Media Gateway is t
268. rom 1000 to 10000 Default Value 6000 INI File Parameter Name msRingCycleTime Enable Glare Detection Description When making an outbound call on the TDM network it specifies whether the gateway will treat the failure to detect Dialtone as a Glare Condition A Glare condition is when an incoming call arrives at the same time a port goes off hook to dial Allowed Values e Yes The failure to detect dialtone will be treated as a Glare No The outbound call will proceed Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name telGlareDetectEnable Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 7 2 9 Note 3 7 2 10 Note 3 7 2 11 Note 3 7 2 12 Parameter Reference Transfer Feature Code Description Defines the Feature Code to dial in order initiate a transfer Allowed Values A string from 0 to 10 digits in length using any of the following characters 0 9 og Default Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Gateway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flash operation INI File Parameter Name telFacTransfer Consult Call Dialtone Drop Code Description Defines the Feature Code to dial in order to drop a Consult call that is in the Dialtone state and to reconnect to the original call Allowed Values A string from 0 to 10 digits in length using any of the following characters 0 9 i Def
269. routable Switch calls then any inbound Switch call that cannot be routed to the IP network is handled in the Routing Table as alternate routes 1 3 Voice over IP Address Translation The Voice over IP VoIP Address Translator provides network services to SIP devices such as the Media Gateway SIP devices register with the VoIP Address Translator to sent and receive SIP calls The VoIP Address Translator can provide network services such as Controlling the number and type of connections allowed across the network Helping to route a call to the correct destination Determining and maintaining the network address for incoming calls Without a VoIP Address Translator all IP destination addresses must be specified to the Media Gateway as IP v4 addresses e g 10 10 4 128 IP terminal devices must also explicitly specify the IP address of the Media Gateway as the desired gateway when originating PBX calls With a VoIP Address Translator IP destination addresses may be specified to the Media Gateway as e mail addresses alphanumeric aliases E 164 telephone numbers domain names and any other format supported by the VoIP Address Translator IP terminal devices may explicitly specify the IP Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 27 Dialogic Corporation Overview 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 2 1 5 28 address of the Media Gateway as the desired gateway or they may rely on the VoIP Address Translator to address the
270. rovides the user with the ability to record in real time diagnostic information This information can then be transferred to a PC for off line analysis of problems Three independent logs are available Trace Capture The Trace log is a verbatim copy of the trace messages that are available using the terminal interface The messages are described in Section 9 6 Trace Mechanism on page 244 Network Capture The network log is a copy of the IP messages transmitted and received by the Gateway Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 235 Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics 9 4 1 1 e TDM Capture The TDM log is a copy of the voice data transferred on the T1 E1 line It is available only on the DMG2000 To view a log you must transfer the log to a PC When transferred to a PC each log is formatted into an industry standard to facilitate viewing and sharing of data The format for each log is Trace Capture Uses an ASCII text format TXT Network Capture Uses an Ethereal format Ethereal is a freeware program downloadable from the Internet It is required only to view Network Captures not to transfer them from the Media Gateway to a PC TDM Capture Uses a Wave file format wav Wave format is a standard Windows format and can be opened by programs such as Windows Media Player Cool Edit and Adobe Audition None of these programs are required to transfer the file from the Gateway to a PC but one is re
271. rt if this parameter value is changed Call Progress Filter SNR in dB DMG2000 Only Description Specifies the Signal to Noise Ratio SNR of the Call Progress Tone Detector Call progress signals whose SNR is lower than specified will be ignored Allowed Values 0 dB to 40 dB Default Value 20 dB INI File Parameter Name cpFilterSnr Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Call Progress Filter Two Tones Max Twist in dB DMG2000 Only Description Specifies the maximum twist for two tone Call Progress Tones Call progress signals that consist of two tones whose power ratio of the tones is greater than the specified twist will be ignored Allowed Values 0 dB to 12 dB Default Value 3 dB INI File Parameter Name cpFilterMaxTwist Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed Jitter Buffer Minimum Delay DMG2000 Only Description Specifies the minimum jitter buffer delay The smaller the delay the smaller the jitter buffer It is recommended that this value be at least the duration of one RTP packet interval If the minimum maximum and initial jitter buffer delays are set to the same value the jitter buffer will operate in the non adaptive mode Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Allowed Values 0 to 200 milliseconds Default Value 20 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name dspJbDelayMinMs 3 17 1 16 Jitter Buff
272. rver This parameter is only valid if the Backup Proxy Server Address parameter is configured The Primary Proxy Server must respond to SIP OPTIONS requests in order for the Proxy Query to succeed Allowed Values 10 3600 seconds Default Value 30 seconds INI File Parameter Name sipProxyQueryIntervalSec Timing Group The Timing group includes the following parameters TI Time T2 Time T4 Time TI Multiplier 3 3 6 1 T1 Time Description The T1 Time specifies the SIP request retransmit timeout in milliseconds This timer is started when a SIP request is generated If no response to the request is received in T1 Time milliseconds the request is retransmitted and the timeout is doubled to 2 T1 Time milliseconds If again no response is received before the new timeout the message is again retransmitted and the timeout is again doubled this time to 4 T1 Time milliseconds Allowed Values 200 60000 milliseconds Default Value 500 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name sipT1TimeMs 3 3 6 2 T2 Time Description The T2 Time specifies the maximum retransmit time of SIP request messages except for INVITE in milliseconds The retransmitting of the request and the doubling of the timeout continues until the timeout reaches T2 Time milliseconds Once the timeout reaches T2 Time the Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 63 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 3 6 3 3 3 6 4 3 3 7 64 Note
273. s User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 9 2 2 3 Diagnostics When the test is completed the results will show if the diagnostic test was able to establish a TDM connection with the specified Destination Number Test Passed Normal TDM connection was successful Test Failed CallEndReason TDM connection failed The CallEndReason description is the error response received either from the specified destination TDM endpoint or the TDM interface of the gateway Some of the most common error responses and causes are Device Not Available TDM interface is not in service User Busy Destination number is busy in use User Not Found Destination number not found at TDM endpoint If an error occurs some other suggestions are Verify gateway TDM interface is in service and configured properly Verify destination TDM endpoint is valid and in service Run the test again with the Trace Capture and Network Capture diagnostic utilizes started to log the detailed call flow of the VoIP interface diagnostic test Call Log The test results from the TDM interface diagnostic tool are also stored in the Media Gateway call log The Source field will contain From Test App to indicate that the connection was created by a diagnostic application The call log is accessible through the Web by selecting the Call Log link on the left side menu of any Web page Figure 39 TDM Interface Call Log Web Page ID Start Time
274. scription This parameter can be used to force Secure Realtime Transport Protocol SRTP packets to be transmitted in an unencrypted fashion even if cipher keys have been negotiated between parties This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not accessible through the Web interface Allowed Values Yes Transmitted RTP VOICE packets will NOT be encrypted despite the negotiation of cipher keys No Transmitted RTP VOICE will be encrypted per the negotiated cipher keys Default Value No INI File Parameter Name srtpUnEncryptedSRTP Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Call Progress Tones 4 Call progress tone parameters define the characteristics frequencies durations and deviations of the tones that the Dialogic Media Gateway detects during call progress analysis The following sections discuss how to view edit learn and validate call progress tones using a Web interface e Viewing and Editing Call Progress Tones 00 0 cece eee eee ees 141 Learning and Validating Call Progress Tones 00 cece eee eee eee 142 4 1 Viewing and Editing Call Progress Tones If call progress tone characteristics are known call progress tones can be viewed and edited manually from the Manual Tones Web page shown in Figure 9 Or the Media Gateway can be directed to analyze and learn the characteristics of specific call progress tones as described in Se
275. sewhere in this Agreement or immediately if you fail to comply with any terms or conditions of this Agreement You agree upon such termination to destroy the Software and documentation together with all copies thereof LIMITATION OF LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT WILL DIALOGIC CORPORATION ITS SUBSIDIARIES ITS SUPPLIERS OR ITS RESELLERS OR THEIR RESPECTIVE DIRECTORS OFFICERS OR EMPLOYEES BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL LOST PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF INFORMATION WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF DIALOGIC CORPORATION OR A SUBSIDIARY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE UPON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED IN ANY CASE DIALOGIC CORPORATION OR ITS SUBSIDIARIES ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED IN THE AGGREGATE THE SUM OF THE FEES THAT YOU PAID FOR THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE IF ANY SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATI
276. sh operation Allowed Values 50 to 4000 milliseconds Default Value 500 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telFlashMs Loop Current Off Debounce Description Specifies the time in milliseconds that loop current can be removed by the PBX on an active call before the DMG1000 considers the line disconnected Allowed Values 500 to 10000 milliseconds Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 8 1 3 3 8 1 4 3 8 2 3 8 2 1 Parameter Reference Default Value 2500 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telLCOff Incoming Rings Before Answer Description Specifies the number of ring bursts that must be present at the DMG1000 before the call is presented to the IP destination as a new call Allowed Values 1 to 100 Default Value 1 INI File Parameter Name telIncomRing Ringing Timeout Description Specifies the number of milliseconds of non ringing that will signal that an incoming call has gone away Allowed Values 100 to 10000 milliseconds Default Value 6000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telRingOffMs Feature Code Group The Analog parameters in the Feature Code group include Transfer Feature Code Consult Call Dialtone Drop Code Consult Call Proceeding Drop Code Consult Call Busy Drop Code Consult Call Connected Drop Code Consult Call Disconnected Drop Code Consult Call Error Drop Code Transfer Feature Code Description Defines t
277. side VoIP to TDM Calls Calls originating from the VoIP interface have two associated URLs One contains the originating address and a calling number The other contains a destination address and a called number The Routing Table uses this information to determine a final TDM destination for the call Let s say a call occurs as follows From 101 172 16 3 131 To 86753090 172 16 3 200 The user at address 172 16 3 131 is attempting to connect to the gateway at 172 16 3 200 The calling number is 101 and the called number is 8675309 Figure 11 below shows how this information enters the Routing Table control Figure 11 VoIP to TDM calls Calling Number 101 Calling Number Called Number 8675309 gt Dial Plan Called Number VolP Address 172 16 3 131 Physical TDM channel Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 151 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table 5 1 2 The Routing Table configuration will determine what calling and called numbers are sent to the TDM device as well as the physical TDM destination TDM to VoIP Calls Calls originating from the TDM interface have a physical source along with Calling Number Calling Name Called Number Called Name Redirect Number and Redirect Name information The Routing Table uses a combination of the physical source Calling Number Calling Name
278. st Groups VoIP Host Groups Load Balanced false Name Defines the name of the host group This name is referenced by routing rules that use the VoIP host group Load Balanced Enables Disables load balancing of outbound requests to the VoIP network If true then the Gateway will route an outbound VoIP request call or MWD to the next VoIP host in the group in a round robin fashion If false then the Gateway will not load balance requests across multiple VoIP hosts in the group and will instead initially route all calls to the first VoIP host in the list Fault Tolerant Enables Disables fault tolerant handling of outbound VoIP requests If true then the Gateway will failover to the next configured VoIP host if an outbound VoIP route attempt fails If false then a failed outbound VoIP route attempt will not be retried Host Summary This section is merely for reference at it lists the hosts that are currently part of the host group Host List Use this table to Add hosts to this group and Delete hosts from this group Figure 26 is a screen shot of the VoIP Host Groups configuration Web page Figure 26 Host List Configuration Web Page 168 The selected Host Group is referenced by the following rules inbound TDM Extension Primary Route inbound TDM InboundTdmMwi Primary Route gt gt aes Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Ro
279. t Selection Initiate Call Answer Call Transfer Call MW Test Mode Simultaneous MW Extension 2008 Intfc Status Outbound Route I Initiate Call l Answer Call l Transfer Call I MW I Orig Prog DTMF Disc Ans CPID DTMF Xfr Ans CPID DIMF Rel Set Clr 1 Complete 1 2000 gt 2 2001 gt 4 2003 P P P P P P P P P P P P P P 2 Complete 2 2001 gt 4 2003 gt 1 2000 2 Pp P P P B P B P P P B B e 3 Complete 4 Complete 4 2003 gt 1 2000 gt 2 2001 P P p P P P P P P P P P P P 5 Complete P P 6 Complete ES B e E ak P P 7 Complete E E 8 Complete e e P P Test Result Symbols results n a n not tested P passed F failed Initiate Call Test Descriptions Orig Originate an outbound call Prog Receive outbound call progress alerting DTMF Send Receive DIMF digits Disc Receive far end disconnect supervision Answer Call Test Descriptions Answer an incoming call CPID Receive call party identification Send Receive DTMF digits Transfer call Transfer Call Test Descriptions Ans Answer an incoming call CPID Receive call party identification DIMF Receive DIMF digits Rel Release an active call Message Waiting Test Descriptions Set Send messages waiting notification Cir Send no message waiting notification 9 3 2 5 Test Failures If a failure occurs some suggestions are Verify PBX interface is in s
280. t error or conflicts If the Add tone to Configuration checkbox is checked these tones will be added to the tone definition table when you select the Apply Changes button Conflicting Tones The tones listed in this section were successfully learned but were found to conflict with other tones You can select only one of the conflicting tones to be added to or kept in the configuration If the tone that conflicts with the selected tone is already in the tone definition table it will be deleted when you select the Apply Changes button If the conflicting tone is another newly learned tone it will be ignored If the conflicting tones do not overlap by much and it is desired to keep both conflicting tones you can print the results page or write down the tone characteristics for the conflicting tone and add it to the tone definition table manually You will need to manually adjust the tone characteristics of the conflicting tones to remove the conflict Learn Tone Issues and Possible Solutions When comparing tone definitions both the frequency and timing need to be considered To compare frequencies both the frequency itself and the frequency deviation are needed When a frequency is detected on the line it is compared to the bandwidth of the tone definition The Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 4 2 5 Call Progress Tones bandwidth is specified as all of the frequencies from the spe
281. t the timing of the On Off tone or set the number of cadence cycles for the On Off tone to a value greater than 1 An On Off tone with double cadence conflicts with another On Off tone A double cadence is an On Off cadence with two different on and two different off periods For example a ringback tone may have the following cadence on for 500 msec off for 500 msec on for 1500 msec off for 3500 msec This cadence will automatically be learned as an On Off tone with time on as 1000 msec with deviation of 500 msec and Off time of 2000 with deviation of 1500 msec Since this timing has such wide deviation it may conflict with other tones with the same frequency For example if there is a busy tone with the same frequency and the cadence of on for 500 msec off for 500 msec then this busy will conflict with the ringback definition Possible solution To prevent the busy tone event during ringback increase the number of cadence cycles for the busy tone to 2 To prevent ringback event during busy change the cadence type of the ringback to OnOffQuick Set the first time value to a value that is greater than the time on for the busy tone but less than the larger on time of the ringback For this example 1000 msec would be a good choice Set the second time value to a value larger than the longest off time for the ringback For this example 3600 msec would be a good choice Note Changing the cadence type to OnOffQuick may not work if there is alrea
282. te Tone Results page to be displayed A progress page will be displayed showing progress messages as the system proceeds Validate Tone Progress Once the Validate Only button has been selected the Media Gateway will start the process of validating the call progress tone A progress page will automatically appear while the Gateway is validating the tones and progress messages will be posted The message Validating means that the Gateway is redialing the destination addresses and testing to see if the call progress tone definitions can detect the tones The Cancel button cancels the current session and returns to the Learn Tone Web page Validate Tone Results When the Media Gateway has finished validating the tones a results page will be displayed The validated tones are grouped into the following tone results e Validation Errors e Validated Tones After viewing the validation results you can return to the Manual Tones Web Page see Figure 9 by clicking on the Return to Tone Configuration link Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Call Progress Tones Validation Errors An error occurred when trying to validate the tones listed in this section These tones cannot be added to the configuration due to the error encountered Possible reasons for error include Failed Validation unexpected CP tone When the Gateway dialed the destination address to validate the tone an unexpected call
283. terval 65 Call Party Delay 76 Call Progress Filter Debounce 125 Call Progress Filter High Cutoff 126 Call Progress Filter Low Cutoff 125 Call Progress Filter Percent 125 Call Progress Filter SNR in dB 126 Call Progress Filter Threshold 125 Call Progress Filter Two Tones Max Twist in dB 126 Call Progress Tone Generation Event 118 119 120 Central Office Type 1 Caller ID Alert Type 100 Central Office Type 1 Caller ID Type 100 Central Office Type 1 FSK Caller ID Expiration 100 Central Office Type 1 FSK Caller ID Timeout 101 CID to First Ring Timeout 99 Cipher Mode 72 Client IP Address 42 43 Client Subnet Mask 42 44 Codec Frame Size Frames Per Packet 69 Connect Outbound Call On DTMF 78 Consult Call Busy Drop Code 83 96 Consult Call Connected Drop Code 84 97 Consult Call Dialtone Drop Code 83 96 Consult Call Disconnected Drop Code 84 97 Consult Call Proceeding Drop Code 83 96 Contiguous B Channel El 91 CPID Len 112 CPID Padding String 112 Default Network Gateway Address 42 Delay After Flash Hook 81 Destination Address 46 Destination E Mail List 48 Destination Mask 47 Dial Digit On Time 76 Dial Inter Digit Time 76 Dial Pause Time 76 Disconnect on Fax Cleardown Tone 78 DNS Server Address 56 DNS Server Address 2 56 E Mail Alarms Enabled 48 49 50 52 53 E Mail Server IP Address 48 Enable Failover El 93 Enable Failover T1 89 Enable Glare Detection 82 Ethernet Interface 46 Fax Modem Carrier Detect Threshold 134 Fax I
284. teway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flash operation INI File Parameter Name telFacCDropProc Consult Call Busy Drop Code Description Defines the Feature Code to dial in order to drop a Consult call that is in the Busy state and to reconnect to the original call Allowed Values A string from 0 to 10 digits in length using any of the following characters 0 9 dh Default Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Gateway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flash operation INI File Parameter Name telFacCDropBusy Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 8 2 5 Note 3 8 2 6 Note 3 8 2 7 3 8 3 Note Parameter Reference Consult Call Connected Drop Code Description Defines the Feature Code to dial in order to drop a Consult call that is in the Connected state and to reconnect to the original call Allowed Values A string from 0 to 10 digits in length using any of the following characters 0 9 og Default Value Each is a hook flash For the Media Gateway will perform a single hook flash operation For the Media Gateway will perform a double hook flash operation INI File Parameter Name telFacCDropCon Consult Call Disconnected Drop Code Description Defines the Feature Code to dial in order to drop a C
285. the Media Gateway has an IP address of 172 16 3 10 and uses a self signed certificate 1 Start the Media Gateway 2 Start Internet Explorer or any Web browser that supports HTTPS 3 In the Web browser Address box enter http 172 16 3 10 4 At the login screen enter a User name and Password and click OK to login to the Media Gateway 5 Select the Security Web page gt Certificate Management tab gt Certificate Usage table gt HTTPS parameter and check that Self Signed is the selected value 6 Go to the HTTPS table and click on Generate button on the Self Signed row The Self Signed Certificate Generation screen will appear 7 Fill in the text boxes in the Value row of both the Certificate X509 Extensions and Certificate Subject tables and then click the Generate button After a short time the following message will appear Self signed Certificate was created Click Continue to return to the Certificate Management Web page In the HTTPS table click the Export button in the Action column of the Self Signed row to download the certificate from the Media Gateway to the PC oo 9 Configure this certificate on the PC running the Web browser used to connect to the Media Gateway via HTTPS See Section 7 5 Installing Certificate Using Internet Explorer on page 212 for details 10 In the Web browser Address box enter https 172 16 3 10 11 At the login screen enter a User name and Password Then click OK to login to the
286. the TDM span connected to the CO Los Angeles Gateway 1 Allinbound VoIP calls must be routed out the TDM span connected to the PBX 2 Allinbound TDM calls from the span connected to the CO must be routed out the TDM span connected to the PBX 3 Allinbound TDM calls from the span connected to the PBX and with a destination of 1xxx must be routed out the VoIP to the New York City gateway 172 16 5 4 4 Allother inbound TDM calls from the span connected to the PBX must be routed out the TDM span connected to the CO Steps The steps to setup the NYC gateway are presented From this the reader can derive the setup of the LA gateway 1 Determine the required TDM Trunk Groups and the VoIP Host Groups e From requirement 1 we have a VoIP host group of all inbound calls and a TDM trunk group of span connected to PBX e From requirement 2 we have a TDM trunk group of span connected to CO and a TDM trunk group of span connected to PBX e From requirement 3 we have a VoIP host group of Los Angeles gateway e From requirement 4 we have no new trunk groups or VoIP host groups 2 Setup TDM Trunk Groups Name Selection Direction Selection Mode Port Channel Content Span to PBX Ascending Cyclic 2 Span to CO Ascending Cyclic 1 192 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Routing Table 3 Setup VoIP Host Groups Name Load Balanced
287. the tone definitions in use are listed To delete a tone from the INI file set the cpToneEvent to none and that tone will be ignored when the INI file is read To add a tone to an INI file either edit a tone definition whose cpToneEvent is set to none or add a new tone definition Then edit or add all the associated tone parameters Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 16 3 16 1 3 16 1 1 Note 3 16 1 2 Note Parameter Reference Certificates Parameters The Certificates Parameters support Secure Real time Transport Protocol SRTP as well as SIP Transport Layer Security TLS and include the following groups Certificate Usage Group e SRTP Group Certificate Usage Group The Security parameters in the Certificate Usage group include TLS Certificate Type HTTPS Certificate Type TLS Certificate Type Description Determines whether the Media Gateway uses a self assigned or Certificate Authority signed certificate for SIP Transport Layer Security TLS Allowed Values e Self Signed Use the self signed TLS certificate CA Signed Use the Certificate Authority signed TLS certificate Default Value Self Signed INI File Parameter Name secSipTlsUseSelfSignedCert Unit requires a restart if this parameter value is changed HTTPS Certificate Type Description Determines whether the Media Gateway uses a self assigned or CA signed certificate for
288. thentication Required Mutual Authentication Required This parameter should be set to Yes if the user wants the Media Gateway to authenticate the VoIP endpoint that it is communicating with when the VoIP endpoint initiates a SIP session Otherwise this parameter can be set to No TLS Inactivity Timer This will determine when to close a TLS port Any number between 10 to 60000 milliseconds is valid SIPS URI Scheme Enabled Selects the URI scheme SIP or SIPS that the Media Gateway will use for outgoing SIP call requests This may be limited by the capability of the other party that the Media Gateway communicates with The Media Gateway accepts both SIP and SIPS URI schemes Verify TLS Peer Certificate Date If enabled the peer certificate date is verified to detect if the peer certificate has expired If so the call request will be rejected This indicates whether or not the certificate date is verified Enable this feature if you want to detect expired certificates Otherwise keep it disabled This feature will work correctly only if a SNTP server is available Verify TLS Peer Certificate Trust This indicates whether or not a certificate trust is verified A certificate trust is the identity that signs the certificates If the Media Gateway only accepts certificates signed by certain CA then the Media Gateway compares the trust on a certificate to its trust list If the trust is found in the list then the verification will pass E
289. tion endpoint during the diagnostic test 4 If the message waiting diagnostic test is selected choose the Messages Waiting Status to be used in the message waiting notification request To start the specified diagnostic test press the Start Test button on the Web page Note Executing the VoIP interface diagnostic tool temporarily disables gateway functionality Any active connections will be released Figure 34 VoIP Interface Web Page VoIP Test Configuration CHAT EN EXT EN EXT LLL Test Results Result E O XA A O 9 1 2 1 Configuration Options The following configuration items are available to be modified by the user Test Selection Choose the type of diagnostic test to perform Available options are Initiate Call and Send Message Waiting Status Destination VoIP Address The required address of the VoIP endpoint that the diagnostic test will use when attempting to establish a connection If this configuration is empty the diagnostic test will not be performed 220 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics Source Name The alphanumeric name representing the source party that is delivered to the destination endpoint during the diagnostic test This is an optional field that is not required to perform the diagnostic test Source Number The number representing the source party that is delivered to the destination endpoint during the
290. tion sets Some proprietary switches Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 23 Dialogic Corporation Overview provide full call party information across the station set interfaces while others provide little or no call party information across the station set interface The PBX switches that provide little or no call party information typically will provide full call party information across a separate serial interface connection For this reason the Media Gateway supports a serial link interface to the switch or PSTN and supports several serial protocols Figure 3 shows how the Media Gateway connects to a switch or PSTN that uses a serial link to provide call party information Using this serial link the Media Gateway is able to provide full call party information on a PBX switch or PSTN that provides little or no call party information via their station set interfaces Figure 3 IP Gateway Using Serial Link 24 Note Only the Analog and T1 E1 Models vop an connect to the PSTN Terminal zii Device 1 Serial Link l l Media Gateway l Phone Emulating I 1 8 Phone Lines i or o 1 4T1 E1 Digital PBX Trunks VoIP Terminal Device LAN Note The T1 E1 Models must only be connected to the PSTN through an NTU CSU or other device that provides line isolation When a call arrives at a telephony port on the Media Gateway the switch or PSTN will send a
291. tion that the switch recognized the event e No Gateway does not expect the switch to create dial tone after a Flash Hook Default Value Yes INI File Parameter Name telDialToneExpAfterFlashHook Delay After Flash Hook Description Specifies the duration in milliseconds to delay after a Flash Hook if a dial tone confirmation is not expected This parameter can only be changed in the configuration file It is not accessible through the Web interface Allowed Values 100 to 10000 milliseconds Default Value 2000 milliseconds Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 81 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 7 2 5 3 7 2 6 3 7 2 7 3 7 2 8 82 INI File Parameter Name telFlashHookNoDialToneDelayMs Incoming Rings Before Answer Description Specifies the number of ring bursts that must be present at the DMG2000 before the call is presented to the IP destination as a new call Allowed Values 1 to 100 Default Value 1 INI File Parameter Name telIncomRing Ringing Timeout Description Specifies the number of milliseconds of non ringing that will signal that an incoming call has gone away Allowed Values 100 to 10000 milliseconds Default Value 6000 milliseconds INI File Parameter Name telRingOffMs Ring Cycle Time Description Specifies the number of milliseconds of non ringing that will signal that an incoming call has gone away Allowed Values Numerical value f
292. to 3 Default Value 2 INI File Parameter Name dspUdptlDataRedundancy T 38 UDPTL Redundancy Count for T 30 Messages DMG2000 Only Description Specifies the number of redundant IFP frames transferred with each UDPTL packet Allowed Values 0 to 3 Default Value 2 INI File Parameter Name dspUdptl T30Redundancy Fax Transmit Level dBm DMG2000 Only Description Set the FAX transmit level in T 38 FAX relay mode Allowed Values 15 to 0 Default Value 10 INI File Parameter Name dspT38FaxTransmitLevel Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 133 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 17 2 12 Note 3 17 2 13 Note 3 17 3 3 17 3 1 134 Maximum UDPTL Packet Size DMG2000 Only Description Sets the maximum UDPTL packet size in bytes that the T 38 channel will transmit This does not include the IP header or UDP header It only includes the UDPTL header and UPDTL payload Allowed Values 272 to 512 Default Value 512 INI File Parameter Name dspT38UdptlPacketSize Fax Modem Carrier Detect Threshold DMG1000 Only Description Specifies the Threshold used to detect fax carrier Allowed Values 26dBm e 33dBm e 43dBm Default Value 33dBm INI File Parameter Name dspT38CDThresholdDbm This is a ini file parameter only Positive Answer Machine Detection The Positive Answer Machine Detection parameters include Maximum Live Answer Time Minimum L
293. uests Inbound TDM Request Matching CPID Matching Calling x Called m Redirect f Number Number Number Calling m Called x Redirect f Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection Outbound VoIP Host f All to 172 13 4 3 Destination Group CPID Manipulation Calling S Called D Redirect R Number Number Number Calling Called Redirect Name Name p Name R e Primary Select Primary Alternate Route o Alt 1 o Alt 2 o Alt 3 o Alt 4 172 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Routing Table 5 Setup Inbound VoIP Rules Inbound VoIP Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Originating VoIP Host Address X All VoIP Requests Any 1 Inbound VoIP Request Matching CPID Matching Calling m Called x Redirect f Number Number Number Calling i Called m Redirect f Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection Destination TDM Group Any TDM channel CPID Manipulation Calling S Called D Redirect R Number Number Number Calling Called Redirect Name P Name B Name E Select Primary Alternate Route e Primary o Al 1 o Alt 2 o Alt 3 o Alt4 Notes 1 An asterisk specifies all VoIP addresses Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 173 Dialogi
294. uires user information Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 221 Dialogic Corporation Diagnostics If an error occurs some other suggestions are Verify gateway VoIP interface is in service and configured properly Verify destination VoIP endpoint is valid and in service Run the test again with the Trace Capture and Network Capture diagnostic utilities started to log the detailed call flow of the VoIP interface diagnostic test 9 1 2 3 Call Log The test results from the VoIP interface diagnostic tool are also stored in the Media Gateway call log The Source field will contain From Test App to indicate that the connection was created by a diagnostic application The call log is accessible through the Web by selecting the Call Log link on the left side menu of any Web page Figure 36 VoIP Interface Call Log Web Page ID Start Time End Time Source End Reason Inbound info Outbound info 2 16 9 52 00 2 16 9 52 01 From Test App VoIP Normal Mwi Clear 1234 John Doe gt 101 172 16 3 11 2 16 9 51 52 2 16 9 51 52 From Test App VoIP Normal Mwi Set 1234 John Doe gt 101 172 16 3 11 2 16 9 51 43 2 16 9 51 43 From Test App VoIP Normal 1234 John Doe gt gt Rsn Direct 101 172 16 3 11 9 2 TDM Interface Test TDM Interface Test is discussed in the following topics e TDM Interface Test Overview TDM Interface Test Operation 9 2 1 TDM Interface Test Overview The TDM interf
295. ult Value B8ZS INI File Parameter Name tl Encoding Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 7 3 2 3 7 3 3 3 7 3 4 Parameter Reference Framing Description Specifies the type of T1 framing that will be used by the line Allowed Values e SF D4 Superframe format 12 consecutive T1 frames is used e ESF Extended Superframe format 24 consecutive T1 frames is used Default Value ESF INI File Parameter Name tl Framing Selects Transmit Pulse Waveform Description Selects the method to be used for generating the Transmit Waveform Shape Allowed Values Short Haul 110 ft The DMG2000 is 0 110 feet from T1 line source Short Haul 220 ft The DMG2000 is 110 220 feet from T1 line source e Short Haul 330 ft The DMG2000 is 220 330 feet from T1 line source Short Haul 440 ft The DMG2000 is 330 440 feet from T1 line source e Short Haul 550 ft The DMG2000 is 440 550 feet from T1 line source e Short Haul 660 ft The DMG2000 is 550 660 feet from T1 line source Default Value Short Haul 110 ft INI File Parameter Name t1 TxWave ISDN Protocol Description If ISDN is selected as the Signaling Mode specifies the T1 ISDN protocol to be used Allowed Values e QSIG QSIG ISDN protocol is used e NI 2 US National ISDN Phase 2 protocol is used e SESS SESS protocol is used e DMS100 DMS100 protocol is used Default Value QSIG
296. ummary information 215 Summary Web page 34 System parameters Serial Port COM1 Group 107 Serial Port COM2 Group 109 T T1 CAS Protocol Group parameters 80 T1 ISDN Protocol Group parameters 86 T1 E1 Mode Group parameters 79 T1 El parameters 79 El Configuration Group 90 T1 CAS Protocol Group 80 T1 ISDN Protocol Group 86 TI E1 Mode Group 79 TDM Call Type Group 103 TDM Analog parameters 94 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 265 TDM capture 241 telephony status information 217 terminal commands alarms command 256 devstat command 255 ping command 255 restart command 255 ver command 256 terminal interface connecting via Diagnostics connector 243 connecting via Lan connector 244 Timing Group parameters 94 tones see call progress tones 142 trace all command 249 trace all off command 250 trace command 249 trace command and display examples example 1 tracing telephony events 250 example 2 tracing SIP messages 251 example 3 tracing RTP statistics 252 example 4 tracing telephony protocol 254 trace commands 248 trace 249 trace all 249 trace all off 250 trace default 249 trace 1 250 trace port 250 trace reset 250 trace show 248 trace time 250 trace default command 249 trace format 245 trace function 244 trace key 245 trace 1 command 250 trace mechanism trace format 245 trace function 244 trace utility 245 trace port command 250 trace reset com
297. uting Table 5 3 Offline Testing An offline facility exists to test the Routing Table without receiving actual calls To use this feature navigate to the Tests gt Router link via the Media Gateway s user interface Two tables exist in this page The Inbound Route table is used to take simulated call characteristics from an incoming call First the call direction is selected and then the call information is entered The Outbound Route table shows the result that would occur if the simulated incoming call passed through the Routing Table The fields for simulated data match the Routing Table exactly with one exception On inbound TDM calls enter the interface and channel instead of the TDM Trunk Group label This helps test the TDM Trunk Group configuration as well as the routing configuration Figure 27 Inbound VOIP Route and Outbound Route Inbound Route Outbound Route fee Dee RR em De E ELLCL Dee M id eee L1 E e eee C tr eee EL lem ee JH EL I eee E EL le ree E EL lem Test Results Result ooo Ready uma xr Reason Inbound Rule 11 Outbound Group AAA Simulate Route Cancel Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 169 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table Figure 28 Inbound TDM Route and Outbound Route 5 4 170 Inbound Route Outbound Route 9 inbound TOM O Inbound VoIP ce 3 Method Calling Number Calling
298. val s 3 Notes 1 Leaving this entry blank denotes no proxy as in Example 1 2 A backup proxy can be specified The backup is used in the event the primary proxy goes down 3 The Proxy Query Interval is used only when a backup proxy is specified The interval specifies the time between queries to the primary proxy If the primary proxy does not answer the query it is marked as down and the backup proxy is used 190 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Example 6 Toll Bypass Toll Bypass allows a company to make interoffice calls using the company s WAN and without using the public telephone network reducing the cost of phone calls System Configuration Routing Table The sample system configuration shows three offices We named them New York City NYC Los Angeles LA and Seattle to make the example more real world Each office has a number of phones connected to an internal PBX The Seattle PBX connects directly to the Central Office and on to the PSTN public switched telephone network The New York City and Los Angeles offices have their PBX connected to a gateway Each gateway connects to the company s WAN and to a Central Office New York City Office i Central Office Th 1 Gateway 2 T1 PBXA PBXB Los Angeles Office T1 1 Gateway i 2 n
299. ve owners Publication Date November 2009 Document Number 64 0346 07 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Software License Agreement This is a Software License Agreement Agreement between you the Company and your Affiliates and all your Authorized Users collectively referred to hereinafter as You or Your and Dialogic Corporation Dialogic Do not use any Dialogic Corporation software and any associated materials collectively the Software which are loaded on the Dialogic Media Gateway hardware product Product until You have carefully read the following terms and conditions By using the Software You agree to the terms of this Agreement If You do not wish to so agree Dialogic is unwilling to license the Software to You In such event You may not use or copy the Software and You should promptly contact Dialogic for instructions on return of the unused Product s in accordance with Dialogic s standard return policies Using the Product constitutes Your acceptance of the terms and conditions contained in this Agreement You assume responsibility for the selection of the Software to achieve Your intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the Software LICENSE You may use the Software solely in connection with Your organization s use of the Product subject to these conditions You may not copy any part of the Software or its documentation except as authoriz
300. vels to packets The QOS byte may be interpreted as either IPv4 TOS or DiffServ IPv4 TOS Byte Bits 0 2 Precedence RFC 1122 3 6 Type of Service RFC 1349 1455 7 Must be zero PrecedenceBits 0 2 111xxxxx 224 Network Control 110xxxxx 192 Internetwork Control 101xxxxx 160 CRITIC ECP 100xxxxx 128 Flash Override 011xxxxx 96 Flash 010xxxxx 64 Immediate 001xxxxx 32 Priority 000xxxxx 0 Routine Type of Service Bits 3 6 xxx0000x 0 2 Normal xxx1000x 16 Minimize delay xxx0100x 8 Maximize throughput xxx0010x 4 2 Maximize reliability xxx0001x 2 2 Minimize monetary cost xxx1111x 30 Maximize physical link security xxx 32 Priority xxx 0 2 Routine Default Value 0 Routine Normal DiffServ Codepoint Byte 74 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference Bits 0 5 Differentiated Services Codepoint RFC 2474 6 7 Explicit Congestion Notification RFC 2481 Allowed Values 0 255 Default Value 0 INI File Parameter Name gwQosRtp 3 6 TDM General Parameters The TDM General Settings group includes the following parameters PCM Coding Minimum Call Party Delay Phone Emulating Only Maximum Call Party Delay Phone Emulating Only Dial Digit On Time Dial Inter Digit Time Dial Pause Time Turn MWI On FAC Phone Emulating Only Turn MWI Off FAC Phone Emulating Only Outbound Call Connect T
301. vent Cpid 250 gt Direct Tel 1 Prot PIMGXX0511126EB93134DD19188F9BE6A62682B82F6D4083E8DBBB1C5D7ABAF688009BC Tel 1 Prot PIMGXX0612911CB3EE87834C804848D1611B468DAA9 49 6CEF645A59429ADC64505C5BE8FB Tel 1 Prot PIMGXX0605CCB Tel 1 Prot PIMGXX071EF122ABB171D6D0CD98074220E19E8901C84B68AE601B1372923FE2255E19E Tel 1 Event Lamp 60 CallApp0 0 FLASH gt OFF Tel 1 Prot PIMGXX081DF265B1B82C6B322456FA4E979ABF50492CDE81A1CC65EE64FDDA407E29D08A5 Tel 1 Event 0 0 48 MAY 13 7 46 P Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 9 7 Diagnostic Commands This section describes a number of diagnostic commands and includes e Devstat Command Restart Command Ping Command Ver Command Alarm List Command 9 7 1 Devstat Command Diagnostics The Devstat command displays the current high level settings of the unit and the unit s main status and telephony port status The telephony port state can be In Service Out of Service or Active Active means that the port is off hook In Service means that the port is available for use but is currently not in use Out of Service means that the port is disconnected PIMG gt devstat 0x0 00 a0 e6 02 01 19 10 255 255 255 0 10 10 sysStartType Description MAC IP Subnet Mask Gateway Host Status Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Port 7 Port 8 9 7 2 The Restart command causes the unit to warm boot
302. w 1 1 1 22 Note The DMG2000 is available in the following models e DMG2030DTIQ Supports phone emulation mode for a single T1 or El interface DMG2060DTIQ Supports phone emulation mode for two T1 or El interfaces e DMG2120DTIO Supports phone emulation mode for four T1 or El interfaces DMG2060DTISQ Supports phone emulation mode with survivability for two T1 or El interfaces DMG2120DTISQ Supports phone emulation mode with survivability for four T1 or El interfaces The Item Market Name on the Media Gateway may vary slightly depending on the version Depending on the model the Media Gateway can be configured for the following operating mode Phone Emulating Phone Emulating In the Phone Emulating mode the Media Gateway operates as a telephony gateway appliance that emulates the following for transporting PBX functionality over a packet switched network e up to eight station sets DMG1000 models e up to 24 station sets single TI DMG2000 model e up to 48 station sets dual T1 DMG2000 model e up to 96 station sets quad T1 DMG2000 model up to 30 station sets single El DMG2000 model up to 60 station sets dual El DMG2000 model up to 120 station sets quad El DMG2000 model The Media Gateway translates protocols for call setup and release between the IP network and the PBX or PSTN and converts the media formats between the two networks Figure 1 shows how the Media Gateway provides a
303. will reject all requests for non secure audio If SRTP Preferred is specified the gateway will request both secure audio and non secure audio with a preference Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 7 4 2 Data Security for secure audio and the gateway will accept requests for both secure and non secure audio If RTP_Only is specified the gateway will only request non secure audio and will only accept requests for non secure audio Note SRTP_Preferred is not supported in Version 5 1 SU2 Software Master Key Index MKT on Transmit Stream With SRTP audio data for a conversation is encrypted using a key that is called the session key Each session key is derived from a master key communicated through SIP SDP Multiple master keys may be used to add security When multiple master keys are used the master key index is used to identify a master key When an audio data packet arrives the master key index is specified in the packet so the packet receiver knows which key to use to decrypt the packet Not all the devices support this feature Key Derivation Enable Key derivation refers to the process used to generate a session key from a master key If the session key is generated once for each conversation Key Derivation Enabled is set to false Otherwise if a session key is generated more than once from a master key Key Derivation Enabled is set to true Enabling Key Derivation provides more secu
304. xTolpAgcSlewRate TDM to IP AGC Target Level DMG2000 Only Description Defines the PCM to IP AGC target level for a range of 50 to 0 dBm Allowed Values 50 to 0 dBm Default Value 14 dBm INI File Parameter Name dspPbxToIpAgcLevel TDM to IP AGC Max Gain DMG2000 Only Description Defines the PCM to IP AGC maximum gain within the range of 0 to 15 dB Allowed Values 0 to 15 dB Default Value 12 dB INI File Parameter Name dspPbxToIpAgcMaxGain TDM to IP AGC Min Gain DMG2000 Only Description Defines the PCM to IP AGC minimum gain within the range of 0 to 15 dB Allowed Values 0 to 15 dB Default Value 15 dB INI File Parameter Name dspPbxTolpAgcMinGain T 38 Fax Advanced Settings The T 38 Fax Advanced Settings parameters include Allow T 38 ECM Faxes DMG2000 Only Transmit Small T4 ECM T 38 Packets DMG2000 Only Enable T 38 Spoofing DMG2000 Only e TSI Removal DMG2000 Only e CSI Removal DMG2000 Only NSF Removal DMG2000 Only DIS Removal DMG2000 Only e T 38 Packet Loss Concealment Method DMG2000 Only Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide Dialogic Corporation 3 17 2 1 3 17 2 2 3 17 2 3 3 17 2 4 Parameter Reference e T 38 UDPTL Redundancy Count for Fax Page Data DMG2000 Only T 38 UDPTL Redundancy Count for T 30 Messages DMG2000 Only e Fax Transmit Level dBm DMG2000 Only Maximum UDPTL Packet Size DMG2000 Only Fax Modem Carrier
305. y All TDM Requests Inbound TDM Request Matching CPID Matching Calling m Called x Redirect f Number Number Number Calling i Called x Redirect f Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection UE uH VoIP Ho Load Balanced Destination Group CPID Manipulation Calling S Called D Redirect R Number Number Number Calling Called Redirect Name B Name B Name R Select Primary Alternate Route e Primary o Al 1 o Alt 2 o Alt 3 o Alt 4 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 177 Dialogic Corporation Routing Table 5 Setup Inbound VoIP Rules Inbound VoIP Rules Enable Rule Label Request Type Originating VoIP Host Address X All Inbound VoIP Any T Inbound VoIP Request Matching CPID Matching Calling m Called x Redirect f Number Number Number Calling i Called Redirect f Name Name Name Outbound Routes Device Selection pecu 1 Y cios Destination TOM Group Any LDM channel CPID Manipulation Calling S Called D Redirect R Number Number Number Calling Called Redirect Name P Name B Name R Select Primary Alternate Route e Primary o Alt 1 o Alt 2 o Alt 3 o Alt 4 6 Validate the Routing Table The only difference from Example 1 is when simulating Inbound TDM calls Since example 2 uses load balancing each time you click
306. yMediaSupport Codec Frame Size Frames Per Packet Description Refers to the type of coder decoder used for voice compression The parameter values for each Codec type are defined in Table 1 Coder Decoder Parameters on page 69 Table 1 Coder Decoder Parameters Codec Type Frame Size in Bytes Frames Per Packet DMG1000 G 711 Selectable 10 20 30 1 G 723 10 Selectable 1 through 4 G 729 20 Selectable 1 through 8 DMG2000 G 711 Selectable 10 20 30 1 G 723 10 1or2 G 729 20 Selectable 1 through 6 Note DMG1000 only If secure RTP SRTP is enabled Selecting 30 milliseconds frame size for G 711 enables all 8 ports Selecting 20 milliseconds frame size for G 711 enables the first 4 ports only Selecting 10 milliseconds frame size for G 711 disables all ports INI File Parameter Name dspFrameSizeG711 dspFramesPerPktG723k dspFramesPerPktG729 Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User s Guide 69 Dialogic Corporation Parameter Reference 3 4 2 3 4 3 70 Note Fax Group The Fax subgroup includes the following parameter e Fax IP Transport Mode Fax IP Transport Mode Description Defines the method used by the Media Gateway to transport fax calls over IP Allowed Values e None No special processing is performed for transporting fax e T 38 T 38 fax protocol is used e G 711 Passthrough Media Gateway will automatically switch the IP

Dialogic 1000 and 2000 Media Gateway Series User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents